Technical Iv2

Planmeca Compact i Touch v2
™
EN
& Planmeca Compact™ i Classic v2
technical manual
10030406_22
Table of contents
Chapter A: GENERAL & TECHNICAL DATA

1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. 7
2 SYMBOLS ON PRODUCT LABELS ..................................................................................... 7
3 ASSOCIATED DOCUMENTATION .................................................................................... 10
4 TRAINING ........................................................................................................................ 11
5 WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS ..................................................................................... 12
6 MANUAL VERSIONS ........................................................................................................ 13
7 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................ 14
7.1 Dimensions ................................................................................................................................ 17
7.2 Safety switches .......................................................................................................................... 21
7.3 Labels ........................................................................................................................................ 23
8 HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR PCB’S AND SD-CARDS ................................................. 32
8.1 Handling printed circuit boards .................................................................................................. 32
8.2 Handling SD-cards .................................................................................................................... 32
9 EMC INFORMATION ......................................................................................................... 33
Chapter B: CONTROL PANEL FUNCTIONS

1 COMPACT i TOUCH V2 .................................................................................................... 37
1.1 Control panel on instrument console ......................................................................................... 37
1.2 Control panel on Flexy-holder ................................................................................................... 41
1.3 Operating mode ......................................................................................................................... 41
1.4 Checking dental unit details ....................................................................................................... 42
1.5 User programming mode ........................................................................................................... 49
1.6 Programming mode function details .......................................................................................... 53
1.7 Calibrating clock ........................................................................................................................ 61
2 COMPACT i CLASSIC V2 ................................................................................................. 63
2.1 Control panel overview .............................................................................................................. 63
2.2 Normal user functions ................................................................................................................ 63
2.3 User programming mode ........................................................................................................... 63
2.4 Programming mode function details .......................................................................................... 65
Chapter C: USER TYPES AND PERSONAL SETTINGS
Chapter D: SERVICE MODE

1 GENERAL ABOUT SERVICE MODE ................................................................................. 77
1.1 How to enter service mode ........................................................................................................ 78
1.2 How to exit service mode and store settings ............................................................................. 78
1.3 Navigating among the various service modes ........................................................................... 79
Technical manual Planmeca Compact i Touch & Classic v2 1

Table of contents
1.4 Checking current service mode number (Planmeca Compact i Classic only) ........................... 79
1.5 Changing an adjustable setting in the service mode ................................................................. 79
2 SERVICE MODE FUNCTIONS SHORT-FORM ................................................................... 81
3 SERVICE MODE DETAILED DESCRIPTION ................................................................... 102
3.1 Main control system ................................................................................................................. 102
3.2 Instrument MUX ....................................................................................................................... 106
3.3 Instrument ................................................................................................................................ 109
3.4 Control panel ........................................................................................................................... 110
3.5 Suction holder .......................................................................................................................... 111
3.6 Foot control .............................................................................................................................. 113
3.7 Operating light ......................................................................................................................... 116
3.8 Patient chair ............................................................................................................................. 117
3.9 Separator and suction system ................................................................................................. 118
3.10 Direct I/O .................................................................................................................................. 119
3.11 Other ........................................................................................................................................ 121
3.12 New main control board ........................................................................................................... 125
3.13 Water Management System .................................................................................................... 127
3.15 Instrument flushing .................................................................................................................. 131
3.18 Foot control .............................................................................................................................. 132
3.19 Suction Tube Cleaning System ............................................................................................... 134
3.20 Instrument MUX ....................................................................................................................... 134
3.21 Instrument ................................................................................................................................ 135
3.22 Suction ..................................................................................................................................... 135
3.23 Instrument ................................................................................................................................ 135
3.24 Foot control .............................................................................................................................. 135
3.25 Flexy ........................................................................................................................................ 136
3.27 Instrument flushing .................................................................................................................. 136
3.30 Other ........................................................................................................................................ 137
3.32 Chair ........................................................................................................................................ 138
3.33 Headrest .................................................................................................................................. 138
3.34 Romexis connection ................................................................................................................ 139
3.35 Network .................................................................................................................................... 140
3.36 Other service modes ................................................................................................................ 141
3.37 Headrest .................................................................................................................................. 142
3.38 Instrument ................................................................................................................................ 145
3.39 Maintenance ............................................................................................................................ 145
3.40 Compact i v2 specific ............................................................................................................... 146
3.41 Regional ................................................................................................................................... 146
Chapter E: HELP & ERROR MESSAGES

1 HELP MESSAGES .......................................................................................................... 147
1.1 General about help messages ................................................................................................. 147
1.2 Help message short-form table ................................................................................................ 147
2 ERROR MESSAGES ....................................................................................................... 156
2.1 General about error messages ................................................................................................ 156
2.2 Disabling/enabling error messages ......................................................................................... 157
2.3 Error message short-form table ............................................................................................... 157
2 Planmeca Compact i Touch & Classic v2 Technical manual

Table of contents
3 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF ERROR MESSAGES ........................................................ 166

3.1 General error messages .......................................................................................................... 166
3.2 Power supply related error messages ..................................................................................... 168
3.3 Control panel related error messages ..................................................................................... 170
3.4 Instrument related error messages .......................................................................................... 170
3.5 Instrument multiplexer related error messages ....................................................................... 170
3.6 Suction holder related error messages .................................................................................... 172
3.7 Foot control related error messages ........................................................................................ 173
3.8 Operating light related error messages ................................................................................... 173
3.9 Separator system related error messages .............................................................................. 173
3.10 Patient chair related error messages ....................................................................................... 174
3.11 MAIN CPU related error messages ......................................................................................... 175
3.12 Headrest related error messages ............................................................................................ 176
3.13 Maintenance related errors ...................................................................................................... 176
3.14 Software upgrade error messages .......................................................................................... 176
3.15 Error messages generated by control panel ............................................................................ 177
Chapter F: ROMEXIS CONNECTION CONFIGURATION

4 BASIC CONFIGURATIONS ............................................................................................. 179
4.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 179
4.2 Configuring Planmeca Romexis server settings ...................................................................... 179
4.3 Configuring network connection between Planmeca Romexis and Planmeca Compact i Touch/
Classic ..................................................................................................................................... 179
4.4 Planmeca Romexis licence ..................................................................................................... 180
4.5 Configuring Planmeca Romexis Clinic Management .............................................................. 180
5 CONFIGURING TOUCHPAD FUNCTIONALITY ............................................................... 180
6 CONFIGURING REMOTE OPERATION OF INTRAORAL CAMERA .................................. 180
7 CONFIGURING REMOTE OPERATION OF PLANMECA PLANSCAN ............................... 181
8 CONFIGURING STORING AND MANUAL TRANSFER OF SETTINGS TO ROMEXIS CLIENT
181
9 CONFIGURING AUTOMATIC TRANSFER OF SETTINGS TO ROMEXIS CLIENT ............. 181
10 CONFIGURING UNIT MONITORING, LOGS, SUMMARIES AND HYGIENE INSTRUCTIONS ..
182
11 CONFIGURING SERVICE CONTACT DETAILS ............................................................... 182
12 CONFIGURING DEVICE ALERT E-MAILS ....................................................................... 182
Chapter G: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................. 183
2 MAINTENANCE KIT ........................................................................................................ 184
3 CUSPIDOR ..................................................................................................................... 185
3.1 Fuses ....................................................................................................................................... 185
3.2 Lift motor .................................................................................................................................. 185
3.3 Bowl ......................................................................................................................................... 185
3.4 Suction tubes ........................................................................................................................... 185
3.5 Coarse filters ........................................................................................................................... 185
3.6 Water regulator ........................................................................................................................ 185
3.7 Air regulator ............................................................................................................................. 185
3.8 Regulator block assembly ....................................................................................................... 186
3.9 Microvac II suction system ...................................................................................................... 186
3.10 Other suction systems ............................................................................................................. 186

Table of contents
3.11 Clean water system ................................................................................................................. 186

3.12 Suction tube cleaning system .................................................................................................. 186
3.13 Waterline cleaning system ....................................................................................................... 186
3.14 WEK water disinfection system ............................................................................................... 187
3.15 Internal air and water pressures .............................................................................................. 188
4 FOOT CONTROL ............................................................................................................ 188
5 INSTRUMENT CONSOLE ............................................................................................... 188
5.1 Oil collector .............................................................................................................................. 188
5.2 Instrument hoses ..................................................................................................................... 188
5.3 Instrument multiplexer ............................................................................................................. 188
5.4 Instrument arms ....................................................................................................................... 188
5.5 Instruments .............................................................................................................................. 188
5.6 Control panel ........................................................................................................................... 189
6 MECHANICAL STABILITY .............................................................................................. 189
7 DELIVERY ARMS ........................................................................................................... 189
7.1 OP delivery arm ....................................................................................................................... 189
7.2 Side delivery arm ..................................................................................................................... 189
8 PATIENT CHAIR ............................................................................................................. 190
8.1 Backrest motor ......................................................................................................................... 190
8.2 Safety switches ........................................................................................................................ 190
8.3 Upholsteries ............................................................................................................................. 190
9 SUCTION ARM ............................................................................................................... 190
10 OPERATING LIGHT ........................................................................................................ 190
11 ELECTRICAL SAFETY .................................................................................................... 191
11.1 Protective earth resistance ...................................................................................................... 192
11.2 Insulation resistance ................................................................................................................ 200
11.3 Equipment leakage current ...................................................................................................... 201
11.4 Patient leakage current ............................................................................................................ 201
Chapter H: ADJUSTMENTS
1 MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS ....................................................................................... 203
1.1 Adjusting vertical position of OP delivery arm column ............................................................. 203
1.2 Adjusting friction of OP delivery arm joints .............................................................................. 204
1.3 Adjusting balance of OP delivery arm ...................................................................................... 205
1.4 Adjusting angle of OP delivery arm instrument console .......................................................... 211
1.5 Adjusting side delivery arm base joint friction .......................................................................... 212
1.6 Adjusting friction of side delivery arm joint ............................................................................... 213
1.7 Adjusting side delivery arm instrument console friction ........................................................... 213
1.8 Adjusting lifting friction of side delivery arm ............................................................................. 214
1.9 Adjusting tension of side delivery arm gas spring .................................................................... 215
1.10 Adjusting friction of adjustable suction arm ............................................................................. 216
1.11 Removing play of lifting adapter .............................................................................................. 217
2 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS ........................................................................................ 218
2.1 Calibrating touch panel ............................................................................................................ 218
2.2 Calibrating backrest motor position sensor .............................................................................. 219
2.3 Calibrating lift motor position sensor ........................................................................................ 221
2.4 Rewiring mains voltage selection jumper ................................................................................ 223
3 PNEUMATICAL ADJUSTMENTS ..................................................................................... 224
3.1 Adjusting internal water & air pressures .................................................................................. 224
3.2 Adjusting syringe water and air flow rates ............................................................................... 225
3.3 Adjusting air and water to instruments ..................................................................................... 225

Table of contents
4 BLEEDING OF SPRAY WATER SYSTEM ........................................................................ 226

5 CALIBRATING SUCTION TUBE CLEANING SYSTEM FEEDING TIME ............................. 227
6 ADJUSTING WATERLINE CLEANING SYSTEM WATER PRESSURE .............................. 228
Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR

1 REMOVING COVERS ..................................................................................................... 231
1.1 Cuspidor door .......................................................................................................................... 231
1.2 Cuspidor cover ........................................................................................................................ 231
1.3 Lifting column cover ................................................................................................................. 231
2 UPHOLSTERIES REPLACEMENT ................................................................................... 233
2.1 Headrest upholstery ................................................................................................................ 233
2.2 Backrest upholstery ................................................................................................................. 234
2.3 Seat upholstery ........................................................................................................................ 235
3 INSTRUMENT CONSOLE RELATED ............................................................................... 239
3.1 Attaching Bluetooth adapter to dental unit ............................................................................... 239
3.2 Preparations before instrument multiplexer related replacements .......................................... 241
3.3 Replacing entire multiplexer .................................................................................................... 241
3.4 Attaching extra voltage feed cables to the Instrument multiplexer PCB and to the Control connec-
tor board PCB .......................................................................................................................... 243
3.5 Replacing one multiplexer block (other than syringe) .............................................................. 245
3.6 Replacing multiplexer control membrane ................................................................................ 246
3.7 Replacing instrument control valve .......................................................................................... 247
3.8 Replacing instrument multiplexer proportional valves ............................................................. 247
4 ELECTRICAL PARTS REPLACEMENT ............................................................................ 248
4.1 Upgrading Compact i Touch v2 software ................................................................................ 248
4.2 Upgrading Compact i Classic v2 software ............................................................................... 253
4.3 Upgrading guides and Compact i Touch GUI in Planmeca Romexis ...................................... 253
4.4 Replacing fuses ....................................................................................................................... 254
4.5 Replacing main control PCB .................................................................................................... 255
4.6 Replacing instrument multiplexer PCB .................................................................................... 258
4.7 Replacing touch panel PCB ..................................................................................................... 260
4.8 Replacing suction sensor PCB ................................................................................................ 260
4.9 Replacing transformer ............................................................................................................. 261
4.10 Replacing position sensors ...................................................................................................... 264
4.11 Replacing the backrest motor capacitor .................................................................................. 265
5 MOTORS REPLACEMENT .............................................................................................. 268
5.1 Replacing backrest motor ........................................................................................................ 268
5.2 Replacing chair lift motor ......................................................................................................... 274
6 VALVES & FILTERS REPLACEMENT ............................................................................. 278
6.1 Decompressing water and air pressures ................................................................................. 278
6.2 Replacing entire magnetic valve/pressure regulator assembly ............................................... 278
6.3 Replacing water and air filter/regulator assemblies ................................................................. 279
6.4 Replacing water and air filters and water regulator plug ......................................................... 280
6.5 Replacing water/air regulator membrane ................................................................................ 281
6.6 Replacing water or air main valve assembly ........................................................................... 281
7 REPLACING WATER HEATER ........................................................................................ 283
8 OP DELIVERY ARM PARTS REPLACEMENT .................................................................. 286
8.1 Detaching instrument console from OP delivery arm .............................................................. 286
8.2 Replacing OP delivery arm gas spring .................................................................................... 289
8.3 Replacing OP delivery arm cable ............................................................................................ 297
8.4 Replacing entire OP delivery arm ............................................................................................ 300
9 SIDE DELIVERY ARM PARTS REPLACEMENT ............................................................... 301

Table of contents
9.1 Replacing the side delivery arm gas spring ............................................................................. 301
10 MOBILE CART PARTS REPLACEMENT ......................................................................... 316
10.1 Replacing cart extension cable ................................................................................................ 316
11 FLEXY HOLDER PARTS REPLACEMENT ....................................................................... 318
11.1 Removing holder from suction arm .......................................................................................... 318
11.2 Dismantling holder ................................................................................................................... 320
11.3 Parts replacement .................................................................................................................... 322
11.4 Flexy holder testing .................................................................................................................. 325
12 SUCTION SYSTEM RELATED ........................................................................................ 327
12.1 Function of PM Microvac II separating tank ............................................................................. 327
12.2 Replacing entire PM Microvac II separating tank .................................................................... 330
12.3 Replacing pressure balancing membrane ............................................................................... 331
12.4 Replacing intermediate and/or drain membrane ...................................................................... 331
12.5 Replacing suction closing membrane ...................................................................................... 332
Chapter J: FOOT CONTROL

1 PROGRAMMING WIRELESS FOOT CONTROL ............................................................... 333
1.1 Pairing wireless foot control ..................................................................................................... 333
1.2 Changing battery indicator visibility ......................................................................................... 335
1.3 Adjusting radio settings ............................................................................................................ 335
2 PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR ................................................................................ 337
2.1 Removing foot control cover .................................................................................................... 337
2.2 Replacing foot control PCB ...................................................................................................... 338
2.3 Replacing foot control handle .................................................................................................. 339
2.4 Replacing pedal assembly ....................................................................................................... 340
2.5 Wireless foot control: replacing batteries ................................................................................. 342
3 ADJUSTMENTS .............................................................................................................. 343
3.1 Adjusting angle of foot control pedal ........................................................................................ 343
3.2 Adjusting height of foot control pedal ....................................................................................... 344
3.3 Calibrating foot control ............................................................................................................. 347
Chapter K: DIAGRAMS
The manufacturer, assembler and importer are responsible for the safety, reliability and
performance of the unit only if:
- installation, calibration, modification and repairs are carried out by qualified author-
ised personnel
- electrical installations are carried out according to the appropriate requirements such
as IEC 60364
- equipment is used according to the operating instructions.
Planmeca pursues a policy of continual product development. Although every effort is

made to produce up-to-date product documentation this publication should not be re-
garded as an infallible guide to current specifications. We reserve the right to make
changes without prior notice.
COPYRIGHT PLANMECA
Publication number 10030406 Revision 22
Released 18 September 2017

Chapter A: GENERAL & TECHNICAL
DATA
1 INTRODUCTION
Planmeca Compact i dental unit is an electrically controlled dental device that consists of a
patient chair, cuspidor, delivery arm, dental instruments and an operating light. Planmeca
Compact i is meant to be used for dental treatment by dental care professionals. Service
and maintenance must always be performed by a qualified Planmeca service technician.
This manual contains instructions for operation, maintenance, adjustments, as well as
parts replacement and repair. Please read this manual carefully before servicing the unit.
2 SYMBOLS ON PRODUCT LABELS
SGS listing marking according to US and Canadian standards

(ANSI/AAMI ES60601-1 and CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60601-1)
Type B equipment (Standard IEC 60878).

Type B applied parts for specified dental instruments (Standard IEC 60878).
Type BF applied parts for specified dental instruments (Standard IEC 60878).
Alternating current (Standard IEC 60878).
On/Off switch
Attention, consult accompanying documents (Standard ISO 7010).
General warning (Standard ISO 7010).

2 SYMBOLS ON PRODUCT LABELS Chapter A: GENERAL & TECHNICAL DATA
Warning, crushing hazard: hand (Standard IEC 60878).
Warning; Hot surface (Standard ISO 7010).
IPX1 Protected against dripping water (Standard IEC 60529).
Disposable item. Do not reuse (Standard ISO 7000).
Sterilised using steam or dry heat (Standard ISO 7000).
Do not put fingers inside mechanical parts.
Remove the tray mounting arm when treating patients who have a cardiac pacemaker.
Separate collection for electrical and electronic equipment according to Directive 2002/96/
EC (WEEE).
Date of manufacture (Standard IEC 60878).
Protective earth (Standard IEC 60878).
Radio certification (Japanese Radio Law certification symbol).
To avoid risk of electric shock, this equipment must only be connected to a supply mains
with protective earth.

Chapter A: GENERAL & TECHNICAL DATA 2 SYMBOLS ON PRODUCT LABELS
Note that the mains voltage is always present at the mains terminal under the cover, when
the unit is switched on. Do NOT open the cover.
Turn the main switch off

before servicing the unit
LBL-G-012
WARNING
The unit contains live mains voltage parts. Always first turn off the power to the unit
externally before attempting to service the lift-motor, backrest motor, or any parts
inside the electronics control box.
The power supply must be disconnected externally from, for example, a fuse or a
mains switch. The fuse or main switch must be lockable into off-position.
Turning off the unit from its own mains switch DOES NOT cut off the mains voltage
from all internal nodes.

3 ASSOCIATED DOCUMENTATION Chapter A: GENERAL & TECHNICAL DATA
3 ASSOCIATED DOCUMENTATION
Planmeca Compact i Touch comes with the following manuals:
• User’s manual
For dental care professionals. Describes the dental unit and its different parts as well
as instructs how to operate and clean the dental unit.
• Installation manual
For service personnel. Describes how to install the dental unit.
• Technical manual
For service personnel. Describes the touch panel functions, the various service
modes as well as help and error messages. Contains instructions for preventive
maintenance, calibrations, adjustments and parts replacement and repair. Wiring and
pneumatical diagrams are found at the end of the manual.
The intraoral X-ray unit Planmeca ProX can be installed to Planmeca Compact i Touch v2.
Planmeca ProX is delivered with the following manuals:
• User’s manual
For dental/health care professionals. Describes the intraoral X-ray unit and its
different parts as well as instructs how to operate and clean the X-ray unit.
For service personnel. Describes how to install the intraoral X-ray unit.
• Technical manual
For service personnel. Gives instructions for service situations.
The Planmeca Romexis Clinic Management software is delivered with the following
manuals:
• Planmeca Romexis user’s manual
For dental care professionals. Describes how to monitor and control the activities as
well as gather data related to dental treatments.
• Planmeca Romexis installation manual
For service personnel. Describes how to install the Planmeca Romexis software.
The Planmeca PlanScan scanner is delivered with the following manual:

• Planmeca PlanScan & Planmeca PlanCAD Easy user’s manual
For dental care professionals who take digital impressions for dental restorations.
The Planmeca ProSensor sensor is delivered with the following manuals:

• User’s manual
For dental care professionals. Describes the sensor that is intended to be used for
capturing digital intraoral X-ray images and instructs how to use it.
For service personnel. Describes how to install the sensor.
The sterile water system is delivered with the following manual:

For service personnel. Describes how to install the sterile water pump.

Chapter A: GENERAL & TECHNICAL DATA 4 TRAINING
Before using surface disinfectants, upholstery disinfectants, dental unit water and
waterline disinfectants, or suction disinfectants, read the disinfectant’s material safety data
sheet and the document Planmeca approved disinfectants (30007097). The document can
be found in the Planmeca Material bank at www.planmeca.com.
Before using an instrument, read the instrument’s user’s manual.
For a full list of accessories, refer to the Planmeca product price list.
4 TRAINING
A hands-on user’s training is given in connection with the dental unit installation.

5 WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS Chapter A: GENERAL & TECHNICAL DATA
5 WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
The unit contains live mains voltage parts. Always first turn off the power to the unit
externally before attempting to service the lift-motor, backrest motor, or any parts
inside the electronics control box.
The power supply must be disconnected externally from, for example, a fuse or a
mains switch. The fuse or main switch must be lockable into off-position.
Turning off the unit from its own mains switch DOES NOT cut off the mains voltage
from all internal nodes.
WARNING
No modification of this dental unit is allowed.
WARNING
Do not modify this equipment without authorisation of the manufacturer.
If this equipment is modified, appropriate inspection and testing must be conducted
to ensure continued safe use of equipment.
CAUTION
ELECTRICAL SAFETY
Always replace the fuses with fuses recommended by Planmeca in section 4.4
"Replacing fuses" on page 254. Otherwise patient, operator or equipment safety
cannot be guaranteed. Please see the fuse label on the left side of the control box
for fuse ratings.
CIRCUIT BOARDS
The circuit boards in the unit can be damaged by static electricity and require spe-
cial handling and antistatic packaging materials to be used both during handling
and shipping. See section 8 "HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR PCB’S AND SD-
CARDS" on page 32 for handling details.
CAUTION
ELECTRICAL SAFETY
Medical electrical equipment needs special precautions regarding electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) and needs to be installed and put into service according to the
EMC information provided in the accompanying documents. Portable and mobile
RF communications equipment can affect medical electrical equipment.
CAUTION
GENERAL SAFETY
The unit must be serviced by qualified personnel only, trained by PLANMECA or
approved dealers. Repairs and parts replaced by unqualified personnel carry no
warranty.
Periodic maintenance as described in this manual must be performed on a regular
basis.
CAUTION
Do not use the equipment in close conjunction with anaesthetic gas or in highly oxy-
genated environments (oxygen content >25%).
NOTE
The PC installed to the system must fulfil IEC 60950 requirements.

Chapter A: GENERAL & TECHNICAL DATA 6 MANUAL VERSIONS
NOTE
The monitor installed to the system must fulfil IEC 60950 requirements.
6 MANUAL VERSIONS
Planmeca pursues a policy of continual product development. Although every effort is
made to produce up-to-date product documentation, this publication should not be
regarded as an infallible guide to current specifications. We reserve the right to make
changes without prior notice.
NOTE
This manual is only valid for the Main Control PCB software version 7.7.0 and later.
The installed software version determines the available functions and behaviour of the
unit. If the unit is reporting error or help messages not listed in this manual, please refer to
a newer revision of the manual.
If you find service modes described in this manual that does not exist in the unit, please
update the unit software to the latest version.

7 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Chapter A: GENERAL & TECHNICAL DATA
7 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Original manufacturer
PLANMECA Oy, Asentajankatu 6, 00880 Helsinki, FINLAND
phone: +35 20 7795 500, fax: +358 20 7795 555, www.planmeca.com
Colours
Painted parts: RAL-9016
Upholstery colours: Please consult your dealer for availability
Mechanical dimensions
Installed: (H x D x W) 1210 mm x 963 mm x 1990 mm
(see template for details)
Weight
130 kg (287 lbs)
Maximum lifting capacity of chair, excluding weight of unit

185 kg (407 lbs)
Environmental conditions
Transportation conditions
Temperatures: -20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)
Relative humidity: 5% RH to 95% RH; non-condensing humidity
Air pressure: 700 hPa to 1060 hPa (10 psi to 15 psi)
Storage conditions
Temperatures: -5°C to +60°C (+23°F to +140°F)
If the unit has been stored at temperatures below +10 °C (+50 °C) for more than a few
hours, time must be allowed for the unit to reach room temperature in the original packing
before connecting the unit to the mains voltage.
Unit operating conditions

Temperatures: +15°C to +35°C (+59°F to +95°F)
Altitude: < 2000 m (less than 1.25 miles)

Chapter A: GENERAL & TECHNICAL DATA 7 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Mains voltage and frequency

Mains voltage setting: 100V~
115V~
220-240V~
Mains frequency: 50 or 60 Hz
Fuse rating and type

F1, F2 = Schurter 0001.1014 10A/250V/FAST ACTING/HIGH BR CAP. (100V, 115V)
F1, F2 = Bussmann S501-10-R 10A 250V FAST ACTING/HIGH BR CAP. (100V, 115V)
F1, F2 = Schurter 0001.1012 6.3A/250V/FAST ACTING/HIGH BR CAP. (220V – 240V)
F1, F2 = Bussmann S501-6.3-R 6.3A 250V FAST ACTING/HIGH BR CAP. (220V- 240V)
F3,F4 = 4A/250V/Fast act./High br. cap, Schurter 0001.1010 OR Bussmann S501-4-R
F5 = 8A/250V/Fast act./High br. cap, Schurter 0001.1013 OR Bussmann S501-8-R
F6-F8 = 6.3A/250V/Fast act./High br. cap, Schurter 0001.1012 OR Bussmann S501-6.3-R
Power consumption
Idle unit: 60 VA (unit not in use, OP-light turned on)
Typical average: 350 VA (during patient treatment)
Maximum: 1450 VA (at maximum rated mains voltage, both chair motors
running)
Electrical classification
Class I
Operation of chair lift and backrest motors

Intermittent operation, ED 6%, 25 sec "ON", 400 sec. "OFF"
Water supply
Pressure range: min. 300kPa (44 psi), max. 900 kPa (130 psi)
Flow rate: 4 l / min (maximum consumption at any instance)
Quality: hardness;  8 °dH (1°dH= 20mg Ca/ 3 litres of water)
Connection: 1/4”
Air supply
Pressure range: min. 550 kPa (80 psi), max. 900 kPa (130 psi)
Flow rate: 55 litres / minute (maximum consumption at any instance)
Air quality: medical grade, dry and oil-free
Connection: 1/4”
Suction connection
Vacuum: 150 mbar
Flow rate: 550 l/ min
Connection: Ø 50 / 46 mm

Drain connection
Capacity: min. 10 l/min
Connection: Ø 50 / 46 mm
Foot control power supply (optional)

Type: MENB1010A0903F01
Wireless foot control (optional)

Battery size: AA, LR6
Battery type: NiMH 1.2V, min 2050mAh, low self-discharge,
UL-listed (USA, Canada only)
Planmeca ProSensor power supply (optional)

Phihong Single Port Injector
Type: PSA16U-480 (POE)
Input voltage: 100-240 VAC (50-60 Hz)
Output voltage: 48VDC
Max. output current: 0.35 A
Insulation voltage
Primary-secondary 3000VDC
Suction system cleaning, Orotol Plus

Procedure Dosage Affect time
Suction system cleaning Orotol Plus concentration is Min. 2 minutes; can
3.6% be adjusted
More information on Orotol Plus can be found at

http://www.duerrdental.com/en/products/suction/disinfection-cleaning/orotolr-plus-suction-
unit-disinfectant

7.1 Dimensions
Over-the-patient delivery with balanced instrument arms

Over-the-patient delivery with hanging-tube instruments

Side delivery with hanging-tube instruments

Cart
500mm
Cart_UM_Dims_001.eps
Excluding tray
Excluding tray
~ 936 mm
~ 723 mm
(~ 470)
Cart_UM_Dims_002.eps

7.2 Safety switches

Care should be taken when driving the patient chair from one position to another.
Obstructions in the patient chair’s line of movement activate safety switches that stop the
motorised movements. The safety switches and their functions are described below.
1. Backrest
An obstruction between the backrest and the floor when driving down the chair and/or
the backrest stops downwards chair and backrest movements. Remove the
obstruction to resume normal operation.
2. Chair-mounted left/right suction arm, joint
The suction arm is in the upmost position and prevents the chair and backrest from
being driven downward. They can be driven normally when the suction arm has been
moved downward.
3. Chair-mounted left/right suction arm, arm underside
The suction arm is in the upmost position and prevents the chair and backrest from
being driven downward. They can be driven normally when the suction arm has been
moved downward.
4. Chair bottom and lift adapter
An obstruction between the chair and the floor stops downwards chair and backrest
movements. Remove the obstruction to resume normal operation.
5. Legrest
The position of the legrest is identified as ‘locked’ or ‘unlocked’ (= hangs freely).
Based on this information, the chair can be driven lower when it is locked.
6. Adjustable legrest (all lengths)
An obstruction between the legrest and the floor stops downward chair movements.
Remove the obstruction to resume normal operation.
7. Adjustable legrest (long)
An obstruction between the legrest and the floor stops downward chair movements.
Remove the obstruction to resume normal operation.
8. Bowl
The bowl is above the patient chair and stops upward chair movements. Remove the
obstruction to resume normal operation.
9. Cuspidor door
The patient chair up/down movement is inhibited when the cuspidor door is open.
Also, the operation of instruments is inhibited. Close the door to resume normal
operation.
10. Side delivery; delivery arm joint (down)
The delivery arm is below its mechanical limit and downward backrest movements are
stopped. After stopping, the backrest can be driven upward.
11. Side delivery; delivery arm joint (up)
The delivery arm is above its mechanical limit and upward backrest movements are
stopped. After stopping, the backrest can be driven downward.

2 3 4 5 9 6 7
11
10

7.3 Labels
The following figures show all the labels and their positions.





7.3.1 Detachable parts

The following detachable components are marked with a manufacturer trademark and
model reference. Do not perform dental treatment when either or both of these are
detached.
• Balanced instrument arms
• Headrest
The following detachable components are not critical to operation. The user can perform
dental treatment even if a wrong, similar part is fitted.
• Hygienic membrane

• Armrests
• Flushing holder
• Cup fill tube

• Bowl, filter and filter cap
SC_UM_33.eps
• Side cover plate for cuspidor
• Dentist’s instruments and hoses

CU_v2_INSTR.eps

• Suction hoses
• Assistant’s instruments and hoses
SC_UM_47.eps
• Adapter for Luzzani Minibright syringe
• Adapter for DCI syringe

DCI_syringe_adapter.eps

8 HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR PCB’S AND SD-CARDS Chapter A: GENERAL & TECHNICAL DATA
8 HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR PCB’S AND SD-

CARDS
8.1 Handling printed circuit boards

The circuit boards are well protected against static discharges when they are in the unit.
However, some precautions are necessary when handling the boards since some internal
nodes can easily be damaged by static electricity. This is true especially during low
humidity conditions when there is evidently a potential risk of static discharges.
Keeping these few simple rules in mind when handling PCBs or software chips can make
a big difference;
• Grounding wrist-straps are not necessarily required when handling the boards, as
long as you always first touch a grounded exposed metal part in the unit before
touching the PCB.
• Place the removed PCB immediately in an antistatic plastic bag. This protects it from
later improper handling. Please note that PCBs for warranty replacement must be
returned to the factory properly packaged in antistatic plastic bags.
• Never place a removed PCB on a conductive surface or handle it to another person,
without touching the surface or person first.
8.2 Handling SD-cards

To avoid static discharge problems, the same rules that apply for PCBs should be followed
when handling SD-cards.

Chapter A: GENERAL & TECHNICAL DATA 9 EMC INFORMATION
9 EMC INFORMATION
WARNING
Use of any accessories and cables other than those specified in Planmeca Com-
pact i dental unit documentation, with the exception of cables sold by Planmeca as
replacement parts for internal components, may result in increased emission or
decreased immunity of the dental unit.
WARNING
Planmeca Compact i dental unit should not be used adjacent to or stacked with
other equipment. If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the Planmeca Compact i
dental unit should be observed to verify normal operation in the configuration in
which it will be used.
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic emissions

Planmeca Compact i dental unit is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified
below. The customer or the user of the Planmeca Compact i dental unit should assure that it is
used in such an environment.
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment – guidance
RF emissions Planmeca Compact i dental unit uses RF energy
Group 1 only for its internal function. Therefore, its RF
emissions are very low and are not likely to cause
CISPR 11
any interference in nearby electronic equipment.
RF emissions Planmeca Compact i dental unit is suitable for
Class B use in all establishments, including domestic
establishments and those directly connected to
CISPR 11
the public low-voltage power supply network that
Harmonic emissions supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
Class A
IEC 61000-3-2
Voltage fluctuations/
flicker emissions Complies
IEC 61000-3-3

9 EMC INFORMATION Chapter A: GENERAL & TECHNICAL DATA
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity

Planmeca Compact i dental unit is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of the Planmeca Compact i dental unit should assure that it is used in such an
environment.
Immunity test IEC 60601 Compliance level Electromagnetic environment-
test level guidance
Electrostatic ±6 kV contact ±6 kV contact Floors should be wood, concrete
discharge (ESD) ±8 kV air ±8 kV air or ceramic tile. If floors are
IEC 61000-4-2 covered with a synthetic material,
the relative humidity should be at
least 30%.
Electrical fast ±2 kV for power ±2 kV for power Mains power quality should be
transient/burst supply lines supply lines that of a typical commercial or
IEC 61000-4-4 ±1 kV for input/output ±1 kV for input/output hospital environment
lines lines
Surge ±1 kV line to line ±1 kV line to line Mains power quality should be
IEC 61000-4-5 ±2 kV line to earth ±2 kV line to earth that of a typical commercial or
hospital environment.
Voltage dips, short <5 % UT <5 % UT Mains power quality should be

interruptions and (>95 % dip in UT) (>95 % dip in UT) that of a typical commercial or
voltage variations for 0,5 cycle for 0,5 cycle hospital environment. If the user
on power supply of the Planmeca Compact i dental
input lines 40 % UT 40 % UT unit requires continued operation
(60 % dip in UT) (60 % dip in UT) during power mains interruptions,
IEC 61000-4-11
for 5 cycles for 5 cycles it is recommended that the
70 % UT 70 % UT Planmeca Compact i dental unit
(30 % dip in UT) (30 % dip in UT) be powered from an
uninterruptible power supply.
for 25 cycles for 25 cycles
<5 % UT <5 % UT
(>95 % dip in UT) (>95 % dip in UT)
for 5 s for 5 s
Power frequency( 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency magnetic fields
50/60 Hz) should be at levels characteristic
magnetic field of a typical location in a typical
IEC 61000-4-8 commercial or hospital
environment. The power
frequency magnetic field should
be measured in the intended
installation location to assure that
it is sufficiently low.
NOTE UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.

Chapter A: GENERAL & TECHNICAL DATA 9 EMC INFORMATION
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity

Planmeca Compact i dental unit is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of the Planmeca Compact i dental unit should assure that it is used in such an
environment.
Immunity test IEC 60601 Compliance Electromagnetic environment-
test level level guidance
Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment should be used no closer to any
part of the Planmeca Compact i dental unit,
including cables, than the recommended
separation distance calculated from the
equation applicable to the frequency of the
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms transmitter.
IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80 MHz Recommended separation distance
d = 1,2 P
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m d = 1,2 P 80 MHz to 800 MHz

IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz
d = 2,3 P 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
where P is the maximum output power rating

of the transmitter in watts (W) according to
the transmitter manufacturer and d is the
recommended separation distance in metres
(m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters,
as determined by an electromagnetic site
survey,a should be less than the compliance
level in each frequency range.b
Interference may occur in the vicinity of
equipment marked with the following
symbol:
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by
absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
a Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless)
telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast
cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due
to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured
field strength in the location in which Planmeca Compact i dental unit is used exceeds the
applicable RF compliance level above, Planmeca Compact i dental unit should be observed to
verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be
necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating Planmeca Compact i dental unit.
b
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.

9 EMC INFORMATION Chapter A: GENERAL & TECHNICAL DATA
Recommended separation distances between

portable and mobile RF communications equipment and Planmeca Compact i dental unit
Planmeca Compact i dental unit is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated
RF disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the Planmeca Compact i dental unit can help
prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF
communications equipment (transmitters) and the Planmeca Compact i dental unit as recommended
below, according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Rated maximum output power Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter
of transmitter m
150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
W
d = 1,2 P d = 1,2 P d = 2,3 P
0.01 0.2 0.2 0.3

0.1 0.4 0.4 0.7
1 1.2 1.2 2.4
10 4.0 4.0 8.0
100 12.0 12.0 24.0

Chapter B: CONTROL PANEL
FUNCTIONS
1 COMPACT i TOUCH V2
1.1 Control panel on instrument console
1.1.1 Touch panel

The touch panel shows information related to the current operation and changes
accordingly.
Some of the buttons have indicator lights that show the status of that specific function.
When the unit is in programming mode, the Program button is blue.
In the programming mode, the setting to be changed is displayed on the touch panel, see
section 1.5 "User programming mode" on page 49.
In the programming mode, a disabled or unselected function is displayed in grey. To
enable or select the function, press the grey button and it will turn blue. A blue button
means that the function is enabled or selected.
When you make changes to, for example, the dental unit or instrument settings, you are
required to save the changes by pressing OK. If you do not want to save the changes, you
can close the window without saving the changes by pressing Close.
In case of malfunction, an error code or a help message is displayed on the touch panel,
see Chapter E: "HELP & ERROR MESSAGES" on page 147.
The picture below shows the main functions of the touch panel when the dental unit is in
idle state and no instrument is activated.

1 COMPACT i TOUCH V2 Chapter B: CONTROL PANEL FUNCTIONS
1 Sign out button 11 Bluetooth connection enabled (optional, display

only)
2 Patient recognition (display only) 12 Wireless foot control battery
(optional, display only)
3 Time (display only) 13 Unit buttons
4 Motorised headrest mode 14 Customisable swipe menu
(optional, display only) Swipe to the side to view more functions
5 Date (if configured, display only) 15 Timer button
6 Maintenance button 16 Wireless foot control button (optional)
7 Assistant call / Door open 17 Touchpad button (optional)
8 Chair buttons 18 X-ray film viewer button
9 User name (display only) 19 Program button
10 Romexis connection (optional, display only)

Chapter B: CONTROL PANEL FUNCTIONS 1 COMPACT i TOUCH V2
1.1.2 Organising items on touch panel

You can organise the items in the main window’s swipe menu according to your
preferences.
1. Press Program.
2. Press Organise. A pop-up window opens.
3. Organise the items:
• To move an item, drag the item to the desired position on the menu.
• To remove an item, drag the item to the field at the bottom of the window.
• To add an item, press + and add an item from the selection.
The swipe menu contains several pages. To move an item to another page, drag the
item to the edge of the page and hold it there until the new page opens.
4. Press OK to confirm the new order.
If you do not wish to save the new order, press Close.
1.1.3 Touchpad functionality

The touch panel can be used as a touchpad. Press the Touchpad button on the touch
panel to open the touchpad-view.
The touchpad-view provides you all the functionalities of a computer mouse and keyboard,
so there is no need for an external mouse or keyboard.
NOTE
The touchpad function requires that the dental unit is connected to Planmeca Romexis
software. The software version must be 4.1 or later.
If there is no Planmeca Romexis connection, the function is disabled and the Touchpad
button is grey.
Using touch panel as computer mouse

Press Touchpad to open the mouse-view on the touch panel.
Move your finger on the touch panel to move the cursor accordingly across the monitor or
tablet screen. Scroll a list or text with the scroll wheel to the right and use the buttons at
the bottom just like you would use the left and right mouse buttons.
A short press of the left and right button clicks an item on the screen. When you press the
button for longer, the button stays activated until you release the button by pressing it
again. The button is blue when it is activated.

CP4_touchpad_click.eps
1
2 3
1 Scroll wheel
2 Left button
3 Right button
When you want to exit the touchpad-view, press OK.
Example: Drag-and-drop
Use your finger on the touchpad to move the cursor on the screen to the item that you
want to drag. When the cursor is on the item, press the left button for 1 second to activate
it. The button turns blue. With your finger on the touchpad, drag the item to the correct
location. Press the left button to release it (the button turns grey).
Using touch panel as keyboard

Press ABC to open the keyboard on the touch panel.
An alphanumeric keyboard is displayed for entering text in a text field on the monitor or
tablet screen.
Use the arrows in the top row to move up and down, to the left and right in the text.
The symbols below the arrows in the top row can be used as they are, or as a shortcut to
letters containing that symbol. For example, when you press ^ for about one second,
letters with the symbol ^ are displayed. You will automatically return to the normal view
when you enter one of the letters. To return to the normal view without entering a letter,
press the symbol again.
To display special characters, press Alt. Press Alt again to return to the normal view.

1.2 Control panel on Flexy-holder

The control panel on the Flexy-holder be used for controlling the dental unit and the chair.
The function that is activated when you press the Flexy button can be programmed in
service mode n.160.
1 2
flexy_panel.eps
3
1 Chair buttons
2 Unit buttons
3 Flexy button
1.3 Operating mode

The touch panel is always in the normal operating mode when the unit is switched on.
Please refer to the Planmeca Compact i User’s Manual for descriptions for the normal
touch panel operation and instructions for normal everyday use of the unit.

1.4 Checking dental unit details
1.4.1 About this unit

The technical details about the dental unit are presented in the About this unit window.
1. Press the Program button.
2. Press the About this unit button.
The following information is displayed in the About this unit window. Each item is
described below.
NOTE
The following is an example only and does not necessarily portray the actual situation.
> means that more information can be opened to a new window.
1.4.2 Unit type

Unit Type tells you which type of dental unit you are working on.
1.4.3 Unit serial number

Unit serial number tells you the serial number of your dental unit. If the dental unit’s main
control PCB is not equipped with a software licence dongle, no serial number is displayed.

1.4.4 Unit software version

Unit SW Version shows the software version.
Press > to display detailed information on the different parts of the software.
1.4.5 Service
Service contains information for service situations.
Press > to display the following items:
• Service contact details
• Yearly Maintenance
• Storage information
• GUI Diagnostics
• Clock calibration
• Product registration
• PlanID
Service contact details

The service contact details give the users information on whom to contact when they need
technical assistance.
If the sentence Service contact details received from Romexis is displayed at the bottom of
the window, it means that the contact details have been stored into Planmeca Romexis
software. Any changes made to these details from the dental unit are applicable only until
the next time the dental unit contacts Planmeca Romexis (usually at unit reboot), after
which the locally edited details are replaced by the contact details from Planmeca
Romexis.
You can edit the following service contact details:
• First name
• Last name
• Phone
• E-mail
Edit the contact details by pressing the Edit button next to each item. Enter the PIN-code
1701 when prompted.
A new window with an alphanumeric keyboard opens where you can edit the contact
detail.
Use the arrows in the top row to move to the left and right in the text.
The symbols below the arrows in the top row can be used as they are, or as a shortcut to
letters containing that symbol. For example, when you press ^ for about one second,
letters with the symbol ^ are displayed. You will automatically return to the normal view
when you enter one of the letters. To return to the normal view without entering a letter,
press the symbol again.
To display special characters, press Alt. Press Alt again to return to the normal view.
To save the edited contact detail, press OK.
To exit the window without changing the name, press Close.

Yearly maintenance
Yearly maintenance tells you
• when the yearly maintenance was last performed
• how many days are left until the next yearly maintenance.
The last item, Confirm yearly maintenance, is for confirming that you have successfully
completed the yearly maintenance. Press > to display the Confirm yearly maintenance
window and enter the PIN-code 1701 when prompted. You will then be asked if yearly
maintenance has been performed. Answer the question by pressing Close or OK.
NOTE
In the Planmeca Compact i Classic v2 dental unit, the information about the yearly
maintenance can be configured in service modes 400, 401 and 402.
Storage information
Storage information contains details on the control panel SD card. Press > to display the
relevant information.
GUI diagnostics
GUI Diagnostics lets you search for possible errors in the control panel display. To enter
the GUI Diagnostics window, you will be prompted to enter the PIN-code 1701.
• GUI hardware rev.

Shows the current hardware revision of the control panel.
• Touchpanel filtering
Lets you adjust the minimum time for ‘short press’. That is, for how long you must
press a control panel button before the control panel recognises the touch of your
finger to be a short press on the button. The default is 100 ms. The default for ‘long
press’ is 400 ms and the value of ‘short press’ should not exceed this value.

• Touchpanel abnormality indicator

For field tests.
• Yes – A small indicator will be shown on the top left corner of the touch panel if
the touch panel has detected abnormal use due to, for example, electrical
interference.
• No – The indicator is disabled.
Requires touch panel controller version PM1110A.
• Touchpanel test
An application for testing the touch panel. Lets you test where the screen registers
your touch by moving a cross-hair pattern around the screen either with your finger or
a stylus. The application also supports writing/drawing on the screen.
• Touchpanel controller
Shows the type and version of the controller. Click Ok to close the window.
• Display ghosting test
Lets you test screen burn.
• Touchpanel swipe test
Lets you test swiping on the touch panel. For factory use only.
• V – Indicates that the touch panel has passed the test.
• x – Indicates that the test has failed.
• - – Indicates that test has not been done.
• Touchpanel press test
Lets you test if all sections of the touch panel register the press of your finger. For
factory use only.
• Screen durability test
This test is used to verify that the touch panel works properly under heavy CPU load.
For factory use only.
• Display rotation
Select 0° or 180° Then click Ok to lock the selection or Cancel to close the window
without rotating the display.
Clock calibration
For instructions for how to calibrate the clock, see section 1.7 "Calibrating clock" on page
61.
Product registration
Before the customer starts using the dental unit, they must register it to activate the
warranty.
Registration can be done by going to the website http://support.planmeca.com/register/
and following the instructions. The website can be accessed by reading the QR code with
a QR code reader.

PlanID
In the PlanID window, enable the PlanID reader by pressing the PlanID button so that it
turns blue. In this window you can also view details on the tag ID and the PlanID reader’s
area of operation. The area of operation is changed in service mode n.600.
1.4.6 Network settings

The front page of About this unit shows the dental unit’s IP address next to Network
settings. Press > to display the following information:
NOTE
You can scroll the list either from the list itself, from the scroll bar to the right, or by using
the Up and Down buttons
• Romexis connection
Toggle the arrow button to enable/disable the connection to Planmeca Romexis.
When the connection is enabled, the Romexis symbol can be seen on the control
panel.
When the symbol is grey, the connection to Romexis is on. When the symbol is blue,
there is no connection between the dental unit and Romexis.
• Name of dental unit

The name of the dental unit shown in Planmeca Romexis. The unit name must be
unique and it has to be changed before connecting the unit to Planmeca Romexis.
• IP address
The dental unit’s IP address. The default is 10.0.0.1
The IP address must be unique.

• MAC address
The dental unit’s MAC address. Can not be changed.
• Network mask
Subnet mask. The default is 255.255.255.0
• Gateway
Default gateway. The default is 0.0.0.0
• Romexis server IP address
IP address of Planmeca Romexis server. The default is 0.0.0.0
• Romexis server port
The diagnostic port is configured in the Planmeca Romexis server. The default is
6812
Those settings that can be changed have an Edit button next to them. Press the Edit
button to open a new window where you can edit the setting. You will be prompted to enter
the PIN-code 1701.
When you have made all necessary changes, press OK to save the changes and reboot
the unit.
PIN-code Reboot unit
For more information on Planmeca Romexis Clinic Management, see the Planmeca
Romexis user’s manual.
1.4.7 Message history

Message history displays help and error messages when you press >.
Move up and down on the list with the arrow buttons.

When you click on a message, the message is opened into a new window.
The message history window can be filtered by message type. In the picture above, all
types are listed:
Messages related to cleaning cycles
Help messages
Error messages
Filter the messages by toggling the Message type buttons.

A grey button means that the message type is not listed, and a blue button that it is listed.
You can delete the message history by pressing the Delete message history button. A
confirmation message is displayed. Confirm the deletion by pressing OK.
You can save the message history to a USB memory stick. Insert a USB memory stick to
the USB port on the cuspidor marked “user settings and service” and press the Save to
USB button.
Press OK to close the window.
1.4.8 Bluetooth
When you press > next to Bluetooth, you are directed to a window where you can enable
or disable the Bluetooth connection.

1.4.9 Licences
Licences displays the licences used by the dental unit when you press >.
1.5 User programming mode
NOTE
All programming is performed from the touch panel.
There are several adjustments the user can perform to fulfil individual needs by using the
user programming mode.
Changes that the users make to their personal settings, which include their user settings
(preferred language, colour theme and automatic chair positions view), as well as
instrument, operating light and chair settings will be saved to their personal settings either
in the dental unit or Planmeca Romexis software. These settings are taken into use every
time the users sign in to the dental unit with their own user name. For detailed information
on the different user types and where their personal settings are stored, see Chapter C:
"USER TYPES AND PERSONAL SETTINGS" on page 71.
Romexis users who can not edit their user settings can still set the dental unit’s language
as instructed in section 1.6.13 "Language" on page 60.
All user programming follows the same pattern:

1. If you are programming an instrument, pick up the instrument from the instrument
console. After identifying the instrument, it can be held out from or returned to the
console. If returned, you have 3 seconds to enter the programming mode (the
instrument settings are shown on the display).
2. Press the Program button to activate the programming mode. The button turns blue.
3. Select the desired function from the touch panel.
4. A pop-up window opens where you can adjust the values with the plus (+) and minus
(-) buttons.
NOTE
Alternatively, you can change the settings with the foot control. To increase the
parameter value, push the pedal to the right. To decrease the parameter value, push
the pedal to the left. When the pedal is pushed halfway (right or left) the parameter
changes slowly. When the pedal is pushed to its extreme position (right or left) the
parameter changes quickly.
When you change instrument settings with the foot control, the instrument runs
normally during programming.
5. Press the OK button to store the new setting into memory. The pop-up window closes.
NOTE
To check a function setting (other than automatic position) without programming it, press
Program and the button of the desired function. The setting is displayed on the screen.
Press OK to close the window without changing the setting.
NOTE
The maximum air and water flow rate of the syringe can not be changed via the touch panel.
However, there are screwdriver-adjustable valves inside the console that can be adjusted
if desired. Refer to section 3.2 "Adjusting syringe water and air flow rates" on page 225.

FUNCTION BUTTON SEQUENCE FOR DETAILS

REFER TO
Programming chair Extended view: 1.6.1 "Automatic
automatic positions chair positions" on
page 53
select position
Standard view:
Reducing 1.6.2 "Instrument

instrument speed/ speed/power
power reduction" on page
54
Adjusting spray 1.6.3 "Instrument

water and air flow spray flow rates" on
on selected page 54
instrument
Adjusting chip blow 1.6.4 "Chip blow

air and water flow flow rates" on page
on selected 55
instrument
Adjusting fibre 1.6.5 "Fibre optic

optic light / LED light intensity" on
light intensity on page 55
selected
instrument
Adjusting RPM 1.6.6 "Bien-Air MX
limit of Bien-Air MX brushless
brushless micromotor" on
micromotor page 56
Adjusting torque 1.6.6 "Bien-Air MX

of Bien-Air MX brushless
brushless micromotor" on
micromotor page 56


REFER TO
Adjusting Auto 1.6.6 "Bien-Air MX
forward time for brushless
torque limit micromotor" on
(Bien-Air MX page 56
brushless
micromotor only)
Adjusting length of 1.6.7 "Length of
polymerisation polymerisation
cycle cycle" on page 57
(Planmeca Lumion
polymerisation light
only)
Adjusting timer 1.6.8 "Timer
settings settings" on page 58
Adjusting bowl 1.6.9 "Duration of

rinse time bowl rinsing" on
page 58
Adjusting cup fill 1.6.10 "Duration of

time cup filling" on page
58
Adjusting operating 1.6.11 "Operating

light intensity light intensity" on
page 59
Adjusting operating 1.6.11 "Operating

light intensity of light intensity" on
composite mode page 59
Adjusting duration 1.6.12 "Duration of

of door open / door open /
assistant call assistant call" on
page 59


REFER TO
Changing 1.6.13 "Language"
language on page 60
Adjusting time 1.6.14 "Clock

settings" on page 60
Adjusting date 1.6.15 "Date

settings" on page 61

1.6 Programming mode function details
1.6.1 Automatic chair positions

The chair must be in the desired position to be programmed and the operating light
intensity adjusted to the desired value before entering the programming mode. If not, first
move the chair to the position required using the chair foot control or the chair buttons on
the unit control panel and then adjust the operating light intensity as described in section
1.6.11 "Operating light intensity" on page 59.
1. Press Program.
2. Press the Chair positions button. A list of automatic positions opens.
3. Select the wanted chair position by pressing it on the list (rinsing position, A, B, C or
D).
4. Optionally, edit the name of the automatic position A, B, C or D by pressing Edit next
to the name. This opens a new window with an alphanumeric keyboard where you
can edit the name.
5. Press OK to confirm that you want to save the current position as an automatic
position.
select position
Standard view:
1. Press Program.
2. Press the wanted chair position button where to store the chair’s position (rinsing
position, A, B, C or D).
3. Press OK to confirm that you want to save the current position as an automatic
position.

1.6.2 Instrument speed/power reduction

Reduce the instrument speed/power as follows:
1. Press Program.
2. Press Instrument speed/power reduction. A pop-up window opens.
3. Change the instrument speed/power with the plus (+) and minus (-) buttons.
The minimum speed/power level is 5 or 10% (depending on the instrument) and the
maximum is 95%. The adjustment step is 5.
4. Press OK to exit and store the new settings.
1.6.3 Instrument spray flow rates

Since the adjustment is individual for each instrument, you must indicate which instrument
to program by picking it out from the holder.
1. Press Program.
2. Press Instrument spray. A pop-up window opens.
3. Change the flow rates for water and air with the plus (+) and minus (-) buttons.
Scaler: Change the flow rates for water 1 and water 2 with the plus (+) and minus (-)
buttons.
The minimum value of all parameters is 0 (no flow) and maximum 100. The
adjustment step is 1 in the value range 0 - 35% and 5 in the value range 35 - 100%.
If the dental unit is equipped with the Planmeca Sterile Water System or Steripump, the
sterile water function is selected in this mode.
1. Press Program.
2. Press Instrument spray. A pop-up window opens.
3. Press Sterile water.
The Sterile water symbol indicates that sterilised water is fed to the selected instrument.
The indicator light of the instrument spray button flashes green when the spray is on. For
more information, refer to the Sterile Water System User’s Manual.

1.6.4 Chip blow flow rates

1. Press Program.
2. Press Chip blow. A pop-up window opens.
3. Change the flow rates for water and air with the plus (+) and minus (-) buttons. Please
note that the instrument will not run during this programming operation.
The minimum value of both parameters is 0 (no flow) and maximum 100. The
adjustment step is 1 in the value range 0 - 35% and 5 in the value range 35 - 100%.
The factory setting is full air pressure and water off.
NOTE
The manual chip blow is set as default to be dry (air only), independent of the automatic
chip blow programming. However, if desired, this can be altered, please refer to "n.43 Set
mode of foot controlled chip-blow" on page 110.
1.6.5 Fibre optic light intensity

to program by picking it up from the holder. This mode is valid only for instruments that can
be equipped with a fibre light.
1. Press Program.
2. Press Fibre optic light. A pop-up window opens.
3. Change the light intensity with the plus (+) and minus (-) buttons. Note that the
instrument will not run during this programming operation.
The minimum value is 70% of the maximum intensity and the maximum 100%, and
the adjustment step is 2.
The light can be programmed to be off: after reaching the minimum value the light is
switched off.

1.6.6 Bien-Air MX brushless micromotor

The Bien-Air MX brushless micromotor has six different user-specific presets that can be
edited and saved.
Editing preset values

Activate the micromotor and select the micromotor’s drive mode.
You can toggle between the drive modes by pressing the current drive mode button. If no
drive mode is displayed on the touch panel, press Torque first.
Normal Auto Auto

reverse forward
1. Press Program.
2. Press RPM limit. A pop-up window opens.
3. Change the micromotor speed rate (rpm) with the plus (+) and minus (-) buttons.
The speed/power limit can be altered as follows:
Range In steps of:

100 - 200 10 (e.g. 110, 120 etc...)
200 - 500 20 (e.g. 220, 240, 260 etc...)
500 - 1 000 50 (e.g. 550, 600, 650 etc...)
1 000 - 2 000 100 (e.g. 1 100, 1 200 etc...)
2 000 - 5 000 200 (e.g. 2 200, 2 400 etc....)
5 000 - 10 000 500 (e.g. 5 500, 6 000, 6 500 etc...)
10 000 - 20 000 1 000 (e.g. 11 000, 12 000 etc....)
20 000 - 38 000 2 000 (e.g. 22 000, 24 000 etc....)
5. Press Program.
6. Press Torque. A pop-up window opens.
7. Change the torque limit rate with the plus (+) and minus (-) buttons.
The adjustment range is 10% - 95%.

9. Press Program.
10. Press Auto forward to adjust the counter-clockwise rotation time of the micromotor in
the Auto forward mode. A pop-up window opens.
11. Change the Auto forward time with the plus (+) and minus (-) buttons.
The maximum time is 6 seconds and the minimum 0 seconds, and the time can be
changed in steps of 0.2 seconds.
Press Instrument spray to switch the instrument spray on or off. The amount of water and
air can also be programmed, see 1.6.3 "Instrument spray flow rates" on page 54.
Press Chip blow to switch the automatic chip blow on or off. The amount of water and air
can also be programmed, see 1.6.4 "Chip blow flow rates" on page 55.
When you have modified the settings of a preset, but have not saved them, a dash (–)
replaces the preset number on the display.
Saving edited preset values

When you have modified the settings of a certain preset, you can store them under that
preset so that the modified settings are in use next time you select that preset.
1. Press Program.
2. Press Preset to open a list of presets.
3. Press the preset under which you want to store the modified settings.
The preset window is closed. The settings are stored to your user profile when you
return the instrument to its holder.
1.6.7 Length of polymerisation cycle

The duration of the polymerisation cycle can be programmed only for the Planmeca
Lumion polymerisation light.
1. Press Program.
2. Press Polymerisation cycle. A pop-up window opens.
3. Change the length of the polymerisation cycle with the plus (+) and minus (-) buttons.
The value range is 5 - 100 seconds. The adjustment step is 5 sec. and the default
value is 10 sec.

1.6.8 Timer settings

Up to six timer settings can be programmed into the timer memory.
1. Press Program.
2. Press Timer. A pop-up window opens.
3. Press the timer position where you want to store the timer setting or whose value you
want to change. A new pop-up window opens.
4. Change the length of the timer with the plus (+) and minus (-) buttons.
The minimum value is 5 sec. and the maximum 20 min. The adjustment step is 5 sec.
1.6.9 Duration of bowl rinsing

Adjust the time for bowl rinse as follows:
1. Press Program.
2. Press Bowl rinse. A pop-up window opens.
3. Change the length of the bowl rinse timer with the plus (+) and minus (-) buttons.
The minimum value is 5 seconds and the maximum 240 seconds, and it is adjusted in
steps of 5.
1.6.10 Duration of cup filling

Adjust the time for cup fill as follows:
1. Press Program.
2. Press Cup fill. A pop-up window opens.
3. Change the length of the cup fill timer with the plus (+) and minus (-) buttons.
The minimum value is 2 seconds and the maximum is 10 seconds. The duration is
adjusted in steps of 0.5 seconds.
NOTE
Cup filling is not activated unless the cup is positioned in its place under the cup fill tube.

1.6.11 Operating light intensity
Intensity of operating light

Adjust the intensity of the operating light as follows:
1. Press Program.
2. Press Operating light or Composite mode. Both buttons open the same pop-up
window.
3. Change the intensity of the operating light with the plus (+) and minus (-) buttons.
The active foot control icon shows which value can be adjusted by pushing the foot
control pedal to the left or right. To activate the inactive value, press down the foot
control pedal or press the plus (+) or minus (-) button of the inactive value.
OR
NOTE
The intensity of the operating light can also be adjusted as follows:
You can adjust the intensity of the operating light during treatment by pressing and holding
the Operating light button for longer than one second. To adjust the intensity in the
composite mode, press the Composite mode button for longer than one second.
You can also adjust the intensity during treatment by keeping your hand in front of the
infrared light sensor of the operating light for longer than one second.
After one second, the intensity will increase until you release the button/knob. When you
press and hold the button/knob again, the intensity will start to decrease.
The intensity starts to decrease/increase after the maximum/minimum value has been
reached. When the limit value is reached, you will hear a short signal tone. The adjustment
direction is automatically toggled each time the button is released.
Both methods have the same effect when adjusting the intensity of the operating light.
However, the former is implemented only for the sake of symmetry of the functions, the
later method being the easier to use.
1.6.12 Duration of door open / assistant call

Adjust the duration of the door open / assistant call -function as follows:
1. Press Program.
2. Press Door open / Assistant call. A pop-up window opens.
3. Change the door open / assistant call time with the plus (+) and minus (-) buttons.
The minimum value is 0 seconds, the maximum 250 seconds. The value is adjusted
in steps of 1 in value range 0 - 30, and in steps of 5 in value range 30 - 250. The
default value is 5.

1.6.13 Language
NOTE
These instructions only apply to the Romexis user. Local and PlanID users change the
language by editing their user profile.
Change the language of the touch panel as follows:

1. Press Program.
2. Press the flag to open a list of available languages.
3. Select a language by pressing it.
Move up and down on the list by pressing the up/down buttons.
The list of languages closes and the language of your choice is displayed on the touch
panel.
select language
1.6.14 Clock settings
NOTE
If the Planmeca Romexis Clinic Management module is used together with the Planmeca
Compact i Touch v2 dental unit, you do not need to adjust the clock settings. The dental
unit clock is synchronised with the Planmeca Romexis clock every time the dental unit is
booted up.
Adjust the clock as follows:

1. Press Program.
2. Press Clock. A pop-up window opens.
3. Select the clock programming view by pressing Clock at the bottom of the
programming window.
4. Press 12/24 to change the clock format (12-hour / 24-hour clock), if needed.
5. Change the time with the plus (+) and minus (-) buttons.

1.6.15 Date settings

Adjust the date as follows:
1. Press Program.
2. Press Clock. A pop-up window opens.
3. Select the date programming view by pressing Date at the bottom of the programming
window.
4. When the date is not visible on the control panel, the items in the programming
window are grey. This means that they are disabled.
To show the date on the control panel and to enable programming, press the grey
Date button at the top of the programming window.
The button will turn blue and all items in the window will turn black (which means that
programming is enabled).
5. Select the date format.
Press the arrow to scroll through the different format options.
6. Change the time with the plus (+) and minus (-) buttons.
1.7 Calibrating clock
1. Press Program.
2. Press About this unit.
3. Select Service.
A new window opens.
4. Select Clock calibration.

A new window opens.
5. The dental unit asks you to set the current time. Press Calibrate.

6. Set the current time by changing the hour, minute and second values with the plus (+)
and minus (-) buttons.
It is recommended that you check the current time from an NTP server.
7. Press OK to exit the calibration window.
8. Wait for a minimum period of 7 days for the clock to calibrate. However, a calibration
period of 2-3 weeks is recommended.
9. Press Program to complete the calibration sequence after the minimum calibration
period.
10. Press About this unit.
11. Select Service.

A new window opens.
12. Select Clock calibration.

A new window opens.
13. The dental unit informs that it is ready to calibrate. Press Calibrate.
If you at this point want to reset the calibration (the clock resumes the time it had
before you started the calibration process), press the Reset button. You will be asked
to confirm the reset in a new window.
14. Adjust the time to match the correct time by changing the hour, minute and second
values with the plus (+) and minus (-) buttons.
When you adjust the time, it is recommended that you check the correct time from an
NTP server.
15. Press OK to close the window.
NOTE
The calibration can also be reset at this point, if you, for example, notice that an error
has been made during the calibration process.

Chapter B: CONTROL PANEL FUNCTIONS 2 COMPACT i CLASSIC V2
2 COMPACT i CLASSIC V2
2.1 Control panel overview

This section describes the control panel functions in normal and service modes. There are
some special control and display modes that are not normally available, but which can be
entered by certain button sequences. In the following it is explained what operations can
be achieved with the buttons and which indications appear on the display.
(1) Multi-purpose display;

“PCI” -text displayed when unit is idle
1 - instrument speed or power
- polymerisation light curing time
2 - help and error messages
- instrument settings in program mode
- other unit settings in program mode
C - service mode information
(2) Program mode button and indicator light
A 3
(3) Patient chair control buttons;
S A - backrest down / go to position A
B B - backrest up / go to position B
C - seat up / go to position C
D - seat down / go to position D
S - run to / return from rinsing position
D
(4) Bowl rinse/glass fill button
(5) Extra function button (door open / assistant call
4 5 6 etc.)
(6) Operating light control button
(7) Instrument spray button and indicator light
(8) Micromotor reverse button and indicator light
(9) Automatic chip-blow button and indicator light
7 8 9
2.2 Normal user functions

The control panel is always in the normal operating mode when the unit is switched on.
Please refer to the Planmeca Compact i Classic User’s Manual for descriptions for the
normal control panel operation and instructions for normal everyday use of the unit.
2.3 User programming mode

There are several adjustments the user can perform to fulfil individual needs by using the
user programming mode.
All user programming follows the same pattern:
1. Press the Program button to activate the programming mode. The indicator light will
come on.
2. Select the desired function from the control panel.

2 COMPACT i CLASSIC V2 Chapter B: CONTROL PANEL FUNCTIONS
3. Change the setting of the function with the foot control. Push the pedal halfway right to
increase the parameter value and halfway left to decrease it. If the pedal is pushed
more than 0.4 sec., the value will change as long as the pedal is pushed.
4. Press the Program button to store the new setting into the memory. The indicator light
will go out.
When programming instrument settings; remove the instrument that you wish to program
from its holder. After identifying the instrument it can be either held out from or returned to
its holder. If returned you have 3 seconds time to enter the programming mode.
NOTE
The maximum air and water flow rate of the syringe can not be changed via the control
panel. However, there are screwdriver-adjustable valves inside the console that can be
adjusted if desired. Please refer to 3.2 "Adjusting syringe water and air flow rates" on page
225.

REFER TO
Programming chair 2.4.1 "Automatic
automatic positions
A C chair positions" on
D page 65
B
Adjusting spray 2.4.2 "Instrument

water and air flow spray flow rates" on
on selected page 66
661100__vvooss
sov_016
instrument
Adjusting chip blow 2.4.3 "Chip blow

air and water flow flow rates" on page
on selected 66
661100__vvooss
sov_016
instrument
Adjusting fibre light 2.4.4 "Fibre optic

intensity on light intensity" on
selected page 67
661100__vvooss
sov_016
instrument


REFER TO
Adjusting bowl 2.4.5 "Duration of
rinse and glass fill bowl rinsing and
times glass filling" on page
661100__vvooss
sov_016
67
Adjusting operating 2.4.6 "Intensity of

light intensity operating light" on
page 68
661100__vvooss
sov_016
Alternative method: press and hold
Adjusting extra 2.4.7 "Duration of

function (door/ the door open /
assistant) signal assistant call" on
661100__vvooss
sov_016
duration page 69
2.4 Programming mode function details
2.4.1 Automatic chair positions

The chair must be in the desired position to be programmed before entering the
programming mode. If not, first move the chair to the position required using the chair foot
control or the chair buttons on the unit control panel.
Also, before entering the programming mode:
• turn the operating light on or off
• adjust the intensity of the operating light
1. Press Program.
2. Press the desired chair position button where to store the chair’s position (rinsing
position, A, B, C or D).
The text ‘PoS.n’ will appear on the display (n can then be either S (= rinsing position),
A, b, C or d).
3. Press Program to store the chair position into the memory. The indicator light will go
out.
C
PoS.A
A
S
B

2.4.2 Instrument spray flow rates

SA.35
661100__vvooss
sov_016
+
1. Press Program.
2. Press Instrument spray. The text ‘SA.nn’ or ‘SH.nn’ will appear on the display
indicating which of the parameters will be adjusted (A for air and H for water).
3. Press Instrument spray repeatedly (or the foot control pedal briefly down) to toggle
between air and water adjustment.
4. Change the flow rate with the help of the foot control pedal. Bringing the pedal to the
right will increase the flow, taking it to the left side will decrease the flow. Please note
that the instrument will run normally during this operation. Turbines will start
immediately to full speed.
5. Press Program to exit and store the new spray settings.
NOTE
If the dental unit is equipped with the Planmeca Sterile Water System, the sterile water
function is selected in this mode. Letters ‘St’ indicate that sterilised water is fed to the
selected instrument. The indicator light of the instrument spray button flashes when the
spray is on. For more information, refer to the Sterile Water System User’s Manual.
2.4.3 Chip blow flow rates

to program by picking it up from the holder.
NOTE
The manual chip blow is set as default to be dry (air only), independent of the automatic
chip blow programming. However, if desired, this can be altered, please refer to "n.43 Set
mode of foot controlled chip-blow" on page 110.
1. Press Program.
2. Press Chip blow. The text ‘CA.nn’ or ‘CH.nn’ will appear on the display indicating
which of the parameters will be adjusted (A for air and H for water). The factory setting
is full air pressure and water off.
3. Press Chip blow repeatedly (or the foot control pedal briefly down) to toggle between
air and water adjustment.
4. Change the flow rate with the help of the foot control pedal. Bringing the pedal to the
right will increase the flow, taking it to the left side will decrease the flow. Please note
that the instrument will not run during this programming operation.

5. Press Program to exit and store the new automatic chip blow settings.
661100__vvooss
sov_016
+ CA.nn
2.4.4 Fibre optic light intensity

to program by picking it out from the holder. Obviously this mode is valid only for
instruments that can be equipped with a fibre light.
661100__vvooss
sov_016
+ L. 90
-
1. Press Program.
2. Press Reverse rotation. The text ‘L. nn’ or ‘L. oFF’ will appear on the display.
3. Change the light intensity with the help of the foot control pedal. Bringing the pedal to
the right will increase the light, taking it to the left side will decrease the light. Please
note that the instrument will not run during this programming operation. The light can
be programmed to be always off: after reaching the minimum value the light is
switched off, indicated by ‘L.oFF’ on the display.
4. Press Program to exit and store the new light intensity into the memory.
2.4.5 Duration of bowl rinsing and glass filling

1. Press Program.
2. Press Bowl rinse / glass fill. Press it repeatedly to toggle between bowl rinsing and
cup filling times. The text ‘b.nnn’ indicates bowl rinse time, the text ‘c.nn.n’ indicates
cup filling time.
3. Change the duration with the help of the foot control pedal. Bringing the pedal to the
right increases the time, taking it to the left side decreases the time.
The minimum value of the bowl rinsing is 5 sec. and the maximum 240 sec., and the
adjustment step is 5 seconds. The minimum value of the glass filling is 2 sec. and the
maximum 10 sec., and the adjustment step is 0.5 seconds.
4. Press Program.
b. 30
661100__vvooss
sov_016
+
c. 6.0
-

The duration of the glass filling can alternatively be programmed as follows:

1. Place an empty glass to the glass holder.
2. Press Program.
3. Press Bowl rinse / glass fill twice. The text ‘c.nn.n’ will appear on the display.
4. Push and hold the foot control pedal down. The glass filling time will first be set to 2
seconds and will start to increase after 2 seconds. The pedal can be released and
then pushed again, and the time continues to increase.
5. Press Program to exit and store the new setting.
661100__vvooss
sov_016
2.4.6 Intensity of operating light

1. Press Program.
2. Press Operating light. The text ‘o nnn’ will appear on the display.
3. Change the intensity with the help of the foot control pedal. Bringing the pedal to the
right increases the intensity, taking it to the left side decreases the intensity.
4. Press Program to exit and store the new setting.
o
661100__vvooss
sov_016
+ 85
NOTE
The intensity of the operating light can also be programmed as follows:
Press and hold the operating light button (or the button in the light handle) for longer than
0.5 seconds. As long as the button is pressed, the light intensity slowly decreases (or
increases) until it comes to the minimum (or maximum) value. A short beep sounds at the
end limit. The adjustment direction is automatically toggled each time the button is
released.
Both methods have the same effect when adjusting the brightness of the operating light.
However, the former is implemented only for the sake of symmetry of the functions, the
later method being the easier to use.

2.4.7 Duration of the door open / assistant call

1. Press Program.
2. Press Door open / assistant call. The text ‘d.nnn’ will appear on the display.
3. Change the door open/assistant call time with the foot control. The minimum value is
0 sec. and the maximum 25 sec., and the adjustment step is 0.5 seconds.
4. Press Program.
d. 12
661100__vvooss
sov_016
+


Chapter C: USER TYPES AND
PERSONAL SETTINGS
The dental unit’s configuration determines which user type can sign in to the dental unit:
local user, PlanID user, or Romexis user. These user types have different methods for
signing in to the dental unit, as well as for editing and storing their personal settings.
Personal settings include the following:
• user settings (language, colour theme and automatic chair positions view)
• instrument settings
• operating light settings
• chair settings
The user type selection is made in service mode 210. The tables below specify how user
management, and editing and storing of personal settings differ between the different user
types.
SM210 = 0
Service mode value Local users only (default)
description
What type of user can • Local users (max. 8)
sign in Note: Local users can also sign in with PlanID card
• Guest user
Where are personal • Local user: dental unit
settings stored? • Guest user: not stored
Sign in method Local users and guest user sign in from the Sign in window. If a
PlanID card has been assigned to a local user, they can sign in
by showing the PlanID card to PlanID reader.
Personal settings Local users can edit their personal settings from the dental unit.
extras Local and guest users' personal settings can be reset from the
dental unit.
Guest user uses the dental unit's default settings. Personal
settings that they change during treatment are temporarily stored
in the dental unit. When the guest user signs out, the dental unit
deletes the temporary user profile.
Creating / deleting New local users can be created in the dental unit. Local users
users can be deleted from the dental unit.
Has Romexis No
username
Romexis connection Disabled

SM210 = 1
Service mode value Romexis user only
description
What type of user can Romexis user
sign in
Where are personal Planmeca Romexis
settings stored?
Sign in method No Sign in window is displayed on the dental unit, as the user is
automatically signed in to the dental unit when they log in to
Planmeca Romexis.
Personal settings Romexis user can not edit user settings (= language, colour
extras theme, automatic chair positions view) from the dental unit.
Can set the language of the dental unit.
For Romexis users to receive their own settings when signing in
to the dental unit, they must be logged in to Planmeca Romexis
and the dental unit must be connected to Planmeca Romexis.
If Romexis users make changes to their personal settings during
treatment, they must save these changes to Planmeca Romexis
from Planmeca Romexis before signing out from the dental unit.
When you save the settings, remember to check the box "Send
settings to dental unit at login". For more information, see
Planmeca Romexis user's manual, chapter Clinic Management
module, section Dental unit monitoring.
Creating / deleting Romexis user can be created in Planmeca Romexis.
users
Has Romexis Yes
username One Romexis username can be connected to only one user.
One Romexis username can be used in more than one dental
unit, if these dental units are connected to the same Planmeca
Romexis server.
Romexis connection Enabled

SM210 = 2
Service mode value Local users only
description
• Guest user
settings stored? • Guest user: not stored
Sign in method Local users and guest user sign in from the Sign in window. If a
PlanID card has been assigned to a local user, they can sign in
by showing the PlanID card to PlanID reader.
Personal settings Local users can edit their personal settings.
extras Local and guest users' personal settings can be reset.
Has Romexis No
username

SM210 = 3
Service mode value Local users and Romexis user
description
• Romexis user
• Guest user
settings stored? • Romexis user: Planmeca Romexis
• Guest user: not stored
Sign in method Local users, guest user and Romexis user sign in from the Sign
in window. If a PlanID card has been assigned to a local user,
they can sign in by showing the PlanID card to PlanID reader.
Romexis user must first be logged in to Planmeca Romexis
before they can sign in to the dental unit.
Personal settings Local and guest users' personal settings can be reset from the
extras dental unit.
For Romexis users to receive their own settings when signing in
to the dental unit, they must be logged in to Planmeca Romexis
and the dental unit must be connected to Planmeca Romexis.
If Romexis users make changes to their personal settings during
treatment, they must save these changes to Planmeca Romexis
from Planmeca Romexis before signing out from the dental unit.
When you save the settings, remember to check the box "Send
settings to dental unit at login". For more information, see
Planmeca Romexis user's manual, chapter Clinic Management
module, section Dental unit monitoring.
Romexis user can be created and deleted in Planmeca Romexis.
Has Romexis Local user: no
username Romexis user: yes

SM210 = 4
Service mode value Local users and PlanID user
description
sign in • PlanID users (with Romexis connection)
• Guest user
settings stored? • PlanID user: Planmeca Romexis
• Guest user: not stored
Sign in method Local users and guest user sign in from the Sign in window.
PlanID users sign in by showing the PlanID card to the PlanID
reader.
Personal settings Local users and PlanID user can edit their personal settings from
extras the dental unit.
Local, PlanID and guest users' personal settings can be reset
from the dental unit.
PlanID user receives personal settings from Planmeca Romexis
when signing in to the dental unit.
Creating / deleting New local users can be created in the dental unit.
users Local users can be deleted from the dental unit.
PlanID user can be created in Planmeca Romexis and dental
unit.
Has Romexis Local user: no
username PlanID user: yes

SM210 = 5
Service mode value PlanID user only
description
What type of user can • PlanID users (with Romexis connection)
sign in • If Romexis connection is disabled, guest user can sign in
Where are personal PlanID user: Planmeca Romexis
settings stored? Guest user: not stored
Sign in method PlanID users sign in by showing the PlanID card to PlanID
reader. If Romexis connection is disabled, guest user can sign in
from Sign in window.
Personal settings PlanID user receives personal settings from Planmeca Romexis
extras when signing in to the dental unit.
PlanID and guest users' personal settings can be reset from the
dental unit.
Creating / deleting PlanID user can be created either in the dental unit or in
users Planmeca Romexis
Has Romexis Yes
username

Chapter D: SERVICE MODE
CAUTION
Some of the service mode functions can be used to alter the operation of the unit.
Never use service modes whose operation you are not familiar with.
CAUTION
The chair lift mechanism can be driven at any time (even if the service door is open)
in the service mode. Make sure to remove tools and fingers from the mechanism
prior to running the chair from its controls.
1 GENERAL ABOUT SERVICE MODE

The service mode is intended to assist the technician in the service and setup of the unit:
• display of all internal signals from sensors and switches
• display of internal voltages and other variables
• display of output and control signals
• adjustment of the unit’s parameters
• preset of all the parameters to the factory default
You must enter a PIN-code to enter the service mode. The service mode number is shown
on the display and you can scroll through the service modes with the up and down buttons
on the touch panel.
The main service mode window summarises the contents of the service mode. If it
contains much information, you can view the rest of the text by scrolling the window. A
more detailed description and possible instructions can be accessed by pressing the i-
symbol in the top right-hand corner. The new window is closed by pressing OK.
NOTE
In the service mode, only service mode information (no error or help codes) is displayed on
the touch panel.
NOTE
Even if listed in this manual, some service modes are reserved for future use and might not
yet be implemented in the current software version.

1 GENERAL ABOUT SERVICE MODE Chapter D: SERVICE MODE
1.1 How to enter service mode
1.1.1 Planmeca Compact i Touch

1. Press Program.
2. Press Service mode.
3. Enter the PIN-code.
The PIN-code is 1701.
4. Press OK to confirm the PIN-code.
If the PIN-code is correct, you will enter the service mode.
PIN code
1.1.2 Planmeca Compact i Classic

1. Press and hold the Program button.
2. Press Operating light until you hear a beep (approx. 2 seconds).
3. Press Cup fill / bowl rinse until you hear a beep (approx. 2 seconds).
4. Release both buttons (Program & Cup fill / bowl rinse). The display briefly shows
“SEr” when service mode is entered.
The number of the latest used service mode is displayed on the control panel. After 1
second it will be replaced with the current setting or value of this service mode.
NOTE
If the unit is equipped with the Dürr amalgam separating system or Dürr VSA system,
holding the Program button down for 4 seconds (without additionally pressing any other
buttons) will automatically start the suction system flushing function.
PROGRAM KEY Press and hold Press and hold Release keys
Press and hold until you hear until you hear
continuously a beep a beep
1.2 How to exit service mode and store settings

Press Program to exit the service mode and store the new settings.

Chapter D: SERVICE MODE 1 GENERAL ABOUT SERVICE MODE
1.3 Navigating among the various service modes

The service modes are numbered with consecutive numbers. To move to the required
service mode, do as follows:
• Planmeca Compact i Touch
Use the up and down buttons on the touch panel.
• Planmeca Compact i Classic
Use the chair up and down buttons (C or D) on the control panel. All the patient chair
control buttons are now used for controlling the service mode and do not control the
chair.
C
D
Press to move up in the list Press to move down in the list
The current service mode number (symbol “n” followed by the current service mode
number) is shown on the display when moving around in the list. The service mode
number disappears after 1 second, after which the current service mode setting or value is
displayed.
1.4 Checking current service mode number (Planmeca Compact i Classic

only)
When the service mode setting is shown on the display, pressing briefly either of the
buttons C or D brings momentarily the number of the current service mode to the display.
The unit does not move to the next (or previous) service mode.
1.5 Changing an adjustable setting in the service mode

Some of the service mode numbers display a decimal point after the symbol “n”. These
modes have settings that can be changed, or contain information that has to be scrolled
through. How to change a setting is described below.
1.5.1 Planmeca Compact i Touch

1. Move to the desired service mode as described in 1.3 "Navigating among the various
service modes" on page 79.
2. Enter the SET-mode by pressing the SET button until the yellow indicator light turns
on (1 or 5 seconds, depending on the service mode).
3. Decrease the value with the minus (-) button, or increase it with the plus (+) button.
4. Exit the SET-mode by pressing SET (the indicator light turns off). The SET-mode is
exited automatically if you scroll to a different service mode using the up and down
buttons. However, any changes made to the previous service mode are stored.

1 GENERAL ABOUT SERVICE MODE Chapter D: SERVICE MODE
NOTE
To ensure that changes made in the service mode are stored, you must exit the service
mode by using the Program button. All altered settings, even if they have an immediate
effect, are lost if the power is turned off before pressing the Program button.
1.5.2 Planmeca Compact i Classic

1. Move to the desired service mode as described in section 1.3 "Navigating among the
various service modes" on page 79.
2. Enter the SET-mode by pressing and holding the S-button until the yellow indicator
light turns on (1 or 5 seconds, depending on the service mode).
3. Decrease the value of the setting by pressing the A-button, or increase it by pressing
the B-button.
4. Exit the SET-mode by briefly pressing the S-button (the indicator light turns off). The
SET-mode is exited automatically if you scroll to a different service mode using the C
and D buttons. However, any changes made to the previous service mode are stored.
A
S S
B
Press and hold until Decrease the setting Increase the setting Exit SET mode
LED light turns on
NOTE
To ensure that changes made in the service mode are stored, you must exit the service
mode by using the Program button. All altered settings, even if they have an immediate
effect, are lost if the power is turned off before pressing the Program button.

Chapter D: SERVICE MODE 2 SERVICE MODE FUNCTIONS SHORT-FORM
2 SERVICE MODE FUNCTIONS SHORT-FORM

The following pages list all available service modes as short-form tables. For detailed
descriptions of the service modes, see section 3 "SERVICE MODE DETAILED
DESCRIPTION" on page 102.
The service modes are grouped according to functions into individual tables.
Table 1: Main control system
MODE FUNCTION DISPLAY / RANGE

n.0 Disable programming and limit 0 - 31 (default = 0)
micromotor speed
n.1 Show software version on MCB n.nn.n
n2 Show internal unregulated 33.0VDC (±15%), 28.0 - 38.0 VDC
operating voltage
n3 Show output current of IPS 0.00 - 7.00 A
n4 Show output voltage of IPS 00.0 - 33.0 VDC
n.5 Show scaler electronics ID-code 0 = no scaler electronics installed
1 = LM/Amdent
2 = EMS
3 = Satelec
4 = EMS No Pain
6 = Satelec Newtron
5, 7 = reserved
Location of electronics (long press of SET-button):

--n- = IMUX
---n = MCB
n6 Show service door switch signal 0 = door closed
1 = door open
n7 Show mains frequency nn.n Hz (cycles/second)
n8 Show (optional) assistant syringe - = no hose connected
hose ID 0 = not a syringe
nn = syringe ID code
n9 Show (optional) assistant syringe 0 - 255
hose sense signal
n 10 Show MCB heatsink temperature nn °C (or °F)
n.11 Enable (optional) water heater 0 = disabled (no heating) (default)
- = enabling (10 second delay)
1 = enabled (heating on)
n.12 Set main air valve operation 0 = always closed
1 = always open
A = automatic (default)

2 SERVICE MODE FUNCTIONS SHORT-FORM Chapter D: SERVICE MODE

n.13 Set main water valve operation 0 = always closed
1 = always open
A = automatic (default)
n.14 Disable automatic functions in 0 = no water to cup or bowl
rinsing position 1 = bowl rinse only
2 = cup fill only
3 = cup fill and bowl rinse (default)
n.15 Disable error messages 0 = no error messages are displayed
1 = error messages are displayed (default)
2 = error messages relating to console arm are not
displayed
n.16 Enable factory preset mode - = perform service mode preset
+ = perform user mode preset
n.17 Select display units for pressures 1 = bar (n.nn) and Celsius (default)
and temperature 2 = kPa (nnn) and Celsius
3 = PSI (nn.n) and Fahrenheit
4 = PSI (nn.n) and Celsius
n.18 Factory test For factory use
Table 2: Instrument MUX

n 19 Show software version of IMUX n.nn
CPU
n 20 Show instrument holder and AUX- long bar = active (on)
input signals short bar = in holder (off)
n.21 Show active instrument hose ID- ---- = no active instrument selected
code nn = ID code
0 = no hose connected
n 22 Show active instrument hose 0 - 510
identification signal
n 23 Show active instrument switch/ 0 - 255
sensor signal
n 24 Show console syringe location 0 = no hose
hose ID-code nn = ID code
n 25 Show console syringe location 0 - 255
hose identification signal
n 26 Show console syringe switch 0 - 255
signal
n 27 Show IMUX on/off valve signals long bar = on
short bar = off


n 28 Show IMUX other output signals long bar = on
short bar = off
n 29 Show air / water pressure (±) n.nn bar
difference nnn kPa
nn.n PSI
n 30 Show active instrument drive/ n.nn bar
cooling air pressure nnn kPa
nn.n PSI
n.31 Select the service mode 0 = normal
navigation type 2 = accelerated (default)
1 & 3 = for factory use
n 32 Show active instrument spray air n.nn bar
pressure nnn kPa
nn.n PSI
n 34 Show active instrument spray n.nn bar
water pressure nnn kPa
nn.n PSI
n.36 Set mode of IMUX membrane 0 = off when unit is idle
operation 1 = continuously on when unit is idle (default)
n.37 Disable turbine contamination 0 = disabled
prevention system 1 = enabled (default)
n 38 Show internal water or air A = show internal air pressure
pressure H = show internal water pressure
Xn.nn bar
Xnnn kPa
Xnn.n PSI
Table 3: Instrument

n.39 Set maximum fibre optic and ---- = no valid hose selected
Intracam bulb voltage for selected 0 = factory default (nominal voltage)
hose type
< 0 = decrease max. voltage
> 0 = increase max. voltage
n.40 Fine-adjust bulb voltage for ---- = no valid light selected
selected polymerisation light 0 = factory default
> 0 = increase voltage
< 0 = decrease voltage
n.41 Set fibre optic light turn-off delay 5 - 240 s (default = 30 s)
for all instruments

Table 3: Instrument

n.42 Fine-adjust cooling air pressure ---- = no valid hose selected
for selected hose type 0 = factory default
< 0 = decrease cooling air pressure
> 0 = increase cooling air pressure
n.43 Set mode of foot controlled chip- 0 = as auto-chip is programmed
blow 1 = always dry (default)
2 = no chip blow
n.44 Fine-adjust drive air pressure for ---- = no valid hose selected
selected hose type 0 = factory default
< 0 = decrease drive pressure
> 0 = increase pressure
Table 4: Control panel

n.45 Show control panel type/AUX - = no panel found
input for branch 1 0 = assistant's plus panel
1 = dentist's panel
2 = assistant's panel
3 = dentist's plus panel or touch
n.46 Show control panel type/AUX - = no panel found
input for branch 2 0 = assistant's plus panel
1 = dentist's panel
2 = assistant's panel
3 = dentist's plus panel or touch
n 47 Show control panel button code n.- = row
for branch 1. Not applicable for -.n = column
touch panel
n 48 Show control panel button code n.- = row
for branch 2. Not applicable for -.n = column
touch panel
n.49 Display test for Planmeca All LEDs turn on
Compact i 2009 control panel. Not
applicable for touch panel

Table 5: Suction holder

n 50 Show suction holder type and n = PCB status
status for branch 1 long bar = active
short bar = in holder
n 51 Show suction holder type and n = PCB status
status for branch 2 long bar = active
short bar = in holder
n 52 Show left (high-volume) suction 0 - 255
sensor signal for branch 1
n 53 Show middle (saliva) suction 0 - 255
n 54 Show right (ejector) suction 0 - 255
n 55 Show AUX input signal for branch 0 - 255
1
n 56 Show left (high volume) suction 0 - 255
n 57 Show middle (saliva) suction 0 - 255
n 58 Show right (ejector) suction 0 - 255
n.59 Show AUX input signal for branch 0 - 255
2
Table 6: Foot control

n 60 Show software version of foot n.nn
control
n 61 Show foot control switch signals JA, JB, AUX, A, B, C, D
n 62 Show pedal horizontal position ±255 (horizontal centre = 0)
coordinate
n 63 Show pedal vertical position ±100 (vertical midway = 0)
coordinate
n 64 Show left-side sensor signal nnnn
(unprocessed)
n 65 Show right-side sensor signal nnnn
(unprocessed)


n.66 Select foot control pedal operation 0 = forward (default) (right: forward, left: forward)
mode 1 = instrument control with vertical movement
2 = reversing of micromotor rotation is done with foot
control pedal (right: reverse, left: forward)
3 = reversing of micromotor rotation is done with foot
control (right: forward, left: reverse)
4 = power limitation selection done with foot control
n.67 Disable foot control pedal extra 0 = no extra functions
functions 1 = all features (default)
n.68 Disable automatic chair positions 0 = manual control on, automatic positions off
(A, B, C, D, S) from foot control 1 = all features on (default)
centre knob and right side knob
2 = both chair controls off
n.69 Momentary spray mode / spray 0 - 7 (default = 4)
with foot control mode
Table 7: Operating light

n 70 Show OP-light button signal 0 = button released
1 = button pressed
n.71 Set OP-light maximum voltage nn.n VAC (default = 18.5)
n.72 Disable OP-light automatic turn 0 = completely independent
off/on with chair 1 = synchronised with chair (default)
n.73 Disable OP-light automatic 0 = completely independent
dimming with instrument console 1 = automatic dimming, light returns to initial brightness
polymerisation lights (not when the polymerisation cycle is stopped (default)
polymerisation light in suction
2 = automatic dimming, light returns to initial brightness
holder)
when another instrument is selected or operating light
button is used.
n.74 Disable OP-light dimming function 0 = dimmer function disabled from OP-light push-button
from its button 1 = dimmer function enabled (default)
2 = dimmer function disabled from touch panel button
3 = dimmer function disabled
Table 8: Patient chair

n 75 Show safety switch signal 0 = normal
1 = safety stop plate activated
n.76 Show lift mechanism position 0 - 255
sensor signal
n.77 Show backrest mechanism 0 - 255
position sensor signal

Table 8: Patient chair

n.78 Select rinsing position function 0 = previous position remains in memory when you drive
mode from the rinsing position to an automatic position (SET
button indicator light ON) (default)
1 = previous position is cleared from the memory when you
drive from the rinsing position to an automatic position
(SET button indicator light OFF)
n.79 Lift mechanism position sensor L -_ turn axle counterclockwise
calibration mode L -- ok
L -¯ turn axle clockwise
n.80 Backrest mechanism position b -_ turn axle counterclockwise
sensor calibration mode b -- ok
b -¯ turn axle clockwise
Table 9: Separator and suction system

n 81 Show type of installed suction 0 = Wet (or no) suction system
system 1 = Microvac II (Planmeca) or Dürr CS1
2 = Dürr CAS1 or Dürr Combisep
3 = Metasys
4 = Dürr VSA
5 = Planmeca VSA
6 & 7 = reserved
n.82 Set suction motor turn-off delay 3 - 600 s (default = 3 s)
Cont = Continuously on
n.83 Set number of suction tubes / 0 = no suction system in unit
disable suction system 1 = one suction tube only
2 = two tubes (default)
3 = three tubes (maximum)
n.84 Set type of extra assistant 0 = no extra assistant instrument
instrument 1 = assistant's syringe
2 = water operated saliva ejector
3 = assistant's syringe and water operated saliva ejector
4 = PM Starlight LED polymerisation light
5 = assistant's syringe and PM Starlight
6 = water operated saliva ejector and PM Starlight
7 = assistant's syringe, water operated saliva ejector and
PM Starlight

Table 10: Direct I/O

n 85 Output signals From right:
1st: WMS use, see service mode 126
2nd: Not in use
3rd: Saliva suction selective valve
4th: High-volume suction selective valve
5th: Intracam activated
6th: Microvac pulse valve
7th: Main water valve
8th: Cup fill valve
n 86 Output signals From right:
1st: Assistant syringe water valve
2nd: Assistant syringe heater
3rd: Metasys/Dürr error acknowledge signal or Dürr VSA
rinse valve
4th: Metasys/Microvac/Dürr start signal or Dürr VSA/Wet
suction valve
5th: Water flush to suction system
6th: Ejector control
7th: Bowl rinse control
8th: Main air valve
n 87 Driver signals From right:
1st: Power source control
2nd: Beeper control
3rd: Boiler control
4th: Assistant call / door open / Intracam control relay
5th: Suction motor relay
6th: Backrest movement reversion relay
7th: Lift motor movement reversion relay
8th: Instrument reverse rotation
n 88 Driver signals For factory use
n 89 Input signals From right:
1st: Microvac overfill error
2nd: Metasys/Dürr functional
3rd: Metasys/Dürr separator alarm or Dürr VSA float reed
relay signal
4th: Factory use
5th: Operating light switch
6th: Cuspidor door switch
7th: Metasys separator beeper
8th: Factory use

Table 10: Direct I/O

n 90 Input signals From right:
1st: Scaler electronics selection 1
2nd: Scaler electronics selection 2
3rd: Scaler electronics selection 3
4th: Separator selection 1
7th: WCS container recognition
8th: Patient cup fill button
n 91 Outputs From right:
1st: Not in use
2nd: Not in use
3rd: Backrest motor control
4th: Lift motor control
5th: Chair control
n 92 Inputs For factory use
Table 11: Other

n.93 Adjustment of the duration of the 0 - 20 (default V1 Compact i = 1, V2 Compact i = 2)
spray water impulse
n.94 Set syringe fibre optic light voltage 0 - 4 V (default = 3.7 V)
n.95 Set spray water impulse pressure 0 - 30 (default V1 Compact i = 15, V2 Compact i = 28)
n.96 RPM display / Enable low speed 0 = RPM disabled / low speed function disabled (default)
function for brush micromotors 1 = RPM disabled / low speed function enabled
(optional Plus package)
2 = RPM enabled / low speed function disabled
3 = RPM enabled / low speed function enabled
n.97 Set suction system cleaning time 0 s - 20 min (default = 2 min)
n.98 Select how to freeze Intracam 0 = pedal movement has no effect
image from foot control 1 = pedal movement activates door open/nurse call relay
(video printer freeze)
2 = pedal movement activates serial communication w.
Dimaxis (default) (pedal to the left = toggle freeze/unfreeze
image, pedal to the right = save image)
3 = pedal movement activates relay and serial
communication (1 + 2)
4 - 7 are the same as 0 - 3 but the pedal operation is
vertical.
n.99 Instrument hose flushing 0 = H 99 is not displayed (default)
operation: disable H 99 message 1 = H 99 will show, but does not affect the unit functions
2 = H 99 will show and the long flushing must be
performed.

Table 11: Other

n.100 Select dental unit type Compact i V1: 0 = V1 Prostyle Compact unit without chair
1 = V1 Prostyle Compact unit
2 = V1 Prostyle Compact WE'S unit
3 = V1 Reserved for future use
4 = V1 Planmeca Compact e
5 = V1 Planmeca Compact i without chair / Planmeca
Universal / Planmeca Compact i ceiling-mounted
6 = V1 Planmeca Compact i
7 = V1 Planmeca Compact e with swivel position
recognition
8 = V1 Planmeca Compact i unit without chair, connected
to Planmeca Chair / Planmeca Universal / Planmeca
Compact i ceiling-mounted, connected to Planmeca Chair
9 = V1 Planmeca Simulation Unit
Compact i V2: 11 = V2 Planmeca Compact i without chair
12 = V2 Planmeca Compact i with OP delivery arm
13 = V2 Planmeca Compact i with Side delivery arm
14 = V2 Planmeca Compact i unit without chair, connected
to Planmeca Chair
---- = unit type not selected (default)
n.101 Waterline cleaning status and 0 = normal operation (default)
interrupt 1 - 13 = waterline cleaning operation on
n.102 Disable dry spray mode 0 = dry spray mode enabled (default)
1 = dry spray mode disabled (Plus package signal tones)
2 = dry spray mode disabled (Normal signal tones)
n 103 Show the dental unit type Value format: abcd
where
a = type of Main PCB
b = IMUX version
c = dental unit type
d = patient chair type
n.104 Instrument multiplexer extra water Compact i V1: 0 = disabled (for V1 G-version IMUX only)
valve (EWV) control 2 = Extra water valve enabled (default)
Compact i V2: 1 = Spray water circulation valve (Boot up/
30min circulation, pressure release on instrument select/
drive)
2 = Extra water valve enabled (default)
3 = Spray water circulation valve(pressure release on
instrument select/drive)
n.105 Enable/disable instrument All instrument places are enabled by default
positions
n.106 Set mode of Planmeca Lumion 0 = Independent mode
polymerisation light 1 = Unit controlled mode (default)

Table 11: Other

n.107 Triggering level of E45 adjustment 1 - 17 (default = 17)
n.108 Stopping delay for instrument 0 - 15 (default = 4)
spray air
n.109 Unit type setting to enable or 0 = Compact i
disable the IMUX and the door 3 = Compact e
features
28 = Cart
31 = Independent cart
44 = no instrument console
Table 12: New main control board

n 110 Outputs For factory use
n 113 Show side delivery arm - = no side delivery arm DxUy
emergency switches signals x = downwards switch
y = upwards switch
0 = switch not activated
1 = switch activated
n 114 Show bowl position 0 = bowl not in rest position
1 = bowl in rest position
n 115 Show glass identification signal 0 = cup not in holder
1 = cup in holder
n.116 Select cup filling mode 0 = no identification
1 = cup identification activated (default)
2 = automatic cup filling
n 117 Show active time of drive air pulse For factory use
width modulation
n 118 Show active time of spray water For factory use
pulse width modulation
n 119 Show active time of spray air For factory use
pulse width modulation
n 120 Show active instrument power nn W
consumption
n.121 Select the length of the automatic 0 = 510 (default)
legrest 1 = 460
2 = 390


n.122 Armrest selection 0 = armrests deselected
1 = armrests selected (default)
n.124 Set the type of Planmeca 0 = Normal Planmeca Compact i (default)
Compact i 1 = G Compact i
Table 13: Water Management System

n 125 Show Water Management System See section "Water Management System" later on in this
status chapter.
n 126 Show Water Management System See section "Water Management System" later on in this
inputs and outputs chapter.
n.127 Water Management System water See section "Water Management System" later on in this
flow adjustment chapter.
n.128 Fake pressure sensor readings 0 = normal
1 = fake pressure readings

n.129 Adjustment of the upper limit of See section "New main control board" later on in this
pre-programmed chair positions chapter.
n.130 Disable WCS 0 = WCS in use (default)
1 = starting of WCS disabled
2 = WCS totally disabled
n.131 WCS: adjustment of the syringe 30 - 180 (default = 40)
cleaning solution filling time
n.132 Disable beeper sounds 0 = Beeper on, instrument sounds off (default)
1 = Beeper disabled
2 = Beeper on, instrument sounds on
n.133 Operating light mode 0 = Operating light not installed (even buttons do not work)
1 = Delight installed (no errors from bulb burned out)
2 = Delight installed with errors from bulb burned out (E58
is displayed)
3 = SingLED or Solanna installed (default)
n.134 Motorised headrest 0 = not installed (error E80.2 is displayed if installed)
1 = installed (error E80.1 displayed if not installed)
2 = automatic recognition of headrest (default)


n.135 WMS operation 0 = disabled totally (no operation, no error messages)
1 = not installed (error E63.1 is displayed if installed)
2 = installed (error E63.2 is displayed if not installed)
3 = automatic WMS recognition (main water for pump / cup
fill / high-volume suction) (default)
4 = automatic WMS recognition (main water for pump / cup
fill / high-volume and saliva suction)
n.136 Disable motorised headrest 0 = automatic positions enabled (default)
automatic positions 1 = automatic positions disabled
n.137 Bowl rotation safety features OR 0 = bowl rotation not included in safety circuit / OP delivery
OP delivery arm safety switch arm safety switch installed
operation for units without a bowl 1 = bowl rotation included in safety circuit / OP delivery
arm safety switch not installed (default)
n.138 Simulation system type Compact i V1: 0 = IDSS - Interactive Digital Simulation
System
1 = ASW-1 - Advanced Simulation Workplace Single (main
valves are in normal use)
2 = ASW-N - Advanced Simulation Workplace (main
valves are not in use)
Compact i V2: 0 = Compact i Clinical Simulation System
1 = Compact i Bench Simulation System (main valves are
in normal use)
2 = Compact i Bench Simulation System (main valves are
not in use)
Table 15: Instrument flushing

n.139 Duration of long instrument hose 2 - 9 min (default = 2 min)
flushing

n.140 Suction valve closing time 0 - 3 s (default = 0 s)
adjustment


n.141 Spray water pressure calibration Compact i V1: 0 - 50 (default = 22)
Compact i V2: 0 - 15 (when water using instrument
selected)
n.142 Automatic Instrument Flush 0 = automatic instrument flush disabled (default)
setting 1 = automatic instrument flush enabled

n.143 Foot control button functionality 1 - 10 (default = 2)
n.144 Foot control left-side knob up 0 = No function
functionality 1 = Activate/deactivate suction ejector
2 = Activate/deactivate headrest mode
3 = Activate/deactivate assistant call / door open
functionality
4 = Activate/deactivate intraoral camera
5 = Turn on/off operating light (default)
6 = Activate/deactivate intraoral scanner
7 = Toggle suction on/off
8 = Operating light composite mode on/off


n.146 Foot control right-side knob up 0 = No function
functionality 1 = Activate/deactivate suction ejector
2 = Activate/deactivate headrest mode
3 = Activate/deactivate assistant call / door open
functionality
4 = Activate/deactivate intraoral camera (default)
5 = Turn on/off operating light
6 = Activate/deactivate intraoral scanner
8 = Operating light composite mode on/off
n.148 Touch panel error message 0 = details not visible
details 1 = details visible (default)
n.149 Foot control left-side knob down Select instrument and enter set-mode to select
functionality functionality:
0 = no function
1 = instrument spray
2 = chip blow
3 = fibre optic light
4 = power limit
5 = scaler power
6 = quickstart
7 = reverse
8 = torque limit
9 = drive mode
10 = polisher: short cleaning cycle
11 = polisher: long cleaning cycle
12 = turbine spray water pulsing
Default: -
Table 19: Suction Tube Cleaning System

n.150 STCS feed time calibration See detailed description in section "Suction Tube Cleaning
System" later in this chapter.
n.151 STCS testing For factory use
n.152 STCS Orotol feed bleeding and See detailed description in section "Suction Tube Cleaning
Orotol calibration System" later in this chapter.

n.153 Instrument deselection time 0.4 - 4 s (default = 0.4 s)

Table 21: Instrument

n.154 PM Minetto power/RPM range 0 = PM Minetto micromotor low speed range disabled
(default)
1 = PM Minetto micromotor low speed range enabled
Table 22: Suction

n.155 Set suction toggle off delay 0 - 5 s (default = 0 s)
n.156 Set post suction delay 5 - 10 s (default = 5 s)

n.158 Instrument selection in four- Four-handed dentistry instrument selection
handed dentistry 0 = disabled
1 = enabled

n.159 Wireless foot control sleep mode 1 - 8 hrs (default = 2 hrs).
start time
Table 25: Flexy

n.160 Programmable Flexy button 0 = No function is triggered
functionality 1 = Headrest mode selection
2 = The intraoral camera is activated / deactivated
3 = Rinsing position (default)
4 = Touch-lock is activated / deactivated
6 = Operation light composite mode on/off

n.161 Automatic chair drive mode 0 = normal
1 = list (default)

Table 27: Instrument flushing

n.162 Duration of short instrument hose 10 - 30 seconds (default = 30s)
flushing


n.164 WCS final flushing time 4 - 15min (dental units with bowl, default 4min)
8 - 15min (dental units without bowl, default 10min)
This service mode does not apply to dental units equipped

with WMS.
Table 30: Other

n.165 External relay activation External relay activation is disabled by default
n.166 Suction tube cleaning emptying 0 = disabled
pulse 1 = enabled (default)

n.197 Spray water proportional valve Acceptable value 0..500(mBar) after test.
test
n.198 Spray air proportional valve test Acceptable value 0..500(mBar) after test.
n.199 Drive air proportional valve test Acceptable value 0..500(mBar) after test.
n 200 Boot information bits For factory use
n 201 Boot software checksum For factory use
n 202 Main software checksum For factory use
n.203 Processor watchdog test. Restarts See detailed description in section "3-series" later in this
the dental unit with error E 75.1. chapter.
n.204 Processor reset test. Restarts the See detailed description in section "3-series" later in this
dental unit without errors. chapter.

Table 32: Chair

n.205 Lifter height calibration in See detailed description in section "3-series" later in this
millimetres (mm) chapter.
n.206 Backrest angle calibration in See detailed description in section "3-series" later in this
degrees (deg) chapter.
Table 33: Headrest

n 207 Headrest length in millimetres See detailed description in section "3-series" later in this
(mm) in relation to calibration point chapter.
and virtual origo point
n 208 Headrest height in millimetres See detailed description in section "3-series" later in this
(mm) in relation to backrest zero- chapter.
level and virtual origo point
n 209 Headrest angle in degrees (deg) See detailed description in section "3-series" later in this
in relation to backrest angle and chapter.
virtual origo point
Table 34: Romexis connection

n.210 Enable Romexis connection 0 = disabled (default)
1 = enabled (unit user settings disabled and Romexis
settings enabled)
2 = enabled (unit user settings enabled and Romexis user
settings disabled)
3 = enabled (unit user settings enabled and Romexis user
settings enabled)
4 = enabled (unit user settings enabled and PlanID user
settings enabled)
5 = enabled (PlanID user settings enabled)
n.211 Romexis connection remote 0 - 31 (default = 8)

operation locked features
n.212 Dental unit locally locked features 0 - 127 (default = 0)
when unit is started up
n.213 Set RFID users automatic logout OFF = No automatic logout (default)
time 0.25, 0.50, 1.00, 2.00, 4.00, 8.00 = Automatic logout time
in hours

Table 35: Network

n.220 Set IP address A.b.C.d (default = 10.0.0.1)
n.221 Set subnet mask A.b.C.d (default = 255.255.255.0)
n.222 Set default gateway address A.b.C.d (default = 0.0.0.0)
n.223 Enable/Disable DHCP 0 = disabled (default)

1 = enabled
n.224 Set Romexis address A.b.C.d (default = 0.0.0.0)
Table 36: Other service modes

n.250 Change wireless foot control 0 - 15
transmitter channel
Table 37: Headrest

n 300 Headrest communication status See detailed description in section "Headrest" later in this
chapter.
n.301 Headrest software major version See detailed description in section "Headrest" later in this
chapter.
n.302 Headrest software minor version See detailed description in section "Headrest" later in this
chapter.
n.303 Upgrade headrest software See detailed description in section "Headrest" later in this
chapter.
n.304 Headrest manual angle rotation 4 - 15 (default = 6)
speed Larger value is faster
n.305 Headrest manual height 4 - 15 (default = 6)
movement speed Larger value is faster
n.306 Headrest manual length 10 - 15 (default = 10)
movement speed Larger value is faster
n.307 Headrest automatic movement 4 - 15 (default = 6)
speed Larger value is faster
n.308 Headrest length current limit value 0 - 15 (default = 10)
Larger value = needs more current (force) to stop
n.309 Headrest joint 2 closing gap No function
stopping term value
n.310 Headrest joint 2 (near cushion) 120 - 933
ADC-value / upholstery

Table 37: Headrest

n.311 Headrest joint 1 (near backrest) 64 - 933
ADC-value
n.312 Headrest length ADC-value 178 - 954
n.313 Headrest joint 2 (near cushion) Text H2- is displayed in SET-mode
drive WITHOUT limits and
potentiometer in Set mode
n.314 Headrest joint 1 (near backrest) Text H1- is displayed in SET-mode
drive WITHOUT limits and
n.315 Headrest length calibration See detailed description in section "Headrest" later in this
chapter.
n 316 Headrest joystick directions and See detailed description in section "Headrest" later in this
buttons chapter.
n 317 Potentiometer select line test See detailed description in section "Headrest" later in this
chapter.
n.318 As service mode n.18 but only For factory use
headrest endurance test
n.319 As service mode n.18 but chair For factory use
and headrest endurance tests
n 320 Headrest right joystick horizontal See detailed description in section "Headrest" later in this
ADC-value chapter.
n 321 Headrest right joystick vertical See detailed description in section "Headrest" later in this
ADC-value chapter.
n 322 Headrest left (cabinet side) See detailed description in section "Headrest" later in this
joystick horizontal ADC-value chapter.
n 323 Headrest left (cabinet side) See detailed description in section "Headrest" later in this
joystick vertical ADC-value chapter.

n.324 Instrument durability test For factory use
Table 39: Maintenance

n.400 Set yearly maintenance reminder 0-60 (default = 30)
period.
n.401 Set yearly maintenance period 0-550 days (default = 365)
n.402 How many days left until next -999 - 9999 days
yearly maintenance or confirm
yearly maintenance

Table 40: Compact i v2 specific

n.500 Software upgrade See detailed description in section "Compact i v2 specific"
later in this chapter.
Table 41: Regional

n.600 Change RFID area of operation OFF = NFC and UHF radio disabled (default)
EU = European union
US = North America
CA = Canada
Cn = China
In = India
Kr = Korea
AU = Australia
nZ = New Zealand

n.999 Main program loop speed For factory use

3 SERVICE MODE DETAILED DESCRIPTION Chapter D: SERVICE MODE
3 SERVICE MODE DETAILED DESCRIPTION

The following pages contain detailed information about the service modes, giving useful
information on how to use and interpret the information available. Reading this chapter
gives a good understanding of the unit’s control system. Used abbreviations are explained
in the beginning of this manual.
3.1 Main control system
n.0 Disable programming and limit micromotor speed

(For educational establishment use.) In this mode the programming of the instrument, unit
and/or chair settings can be disabled, the micromotor power can be limited to 50% of the
maximum speed, and the Bien-Air MX preset can be disabled.
The possible settings are described in the table below. The factory default is 0 (zero).
Instrument Unit settings Chair settings Micromotor

settings disabled disabled disabled speed limited
0
1 x
2 x
3 x x
4 x
5 x x
6 x x
7 x x x
8 x
9 x x
10 x x
11 x x x
12 x x
13 x x x
14 x x x
15 x x x x
n.1 Show software version on MCB

Shows which software version is currently installed on the MCB. For example, in version
number “7.00.4” 7 = major version, 00 = minor version and 4 = fix version. When in Set-
mode, the version number may be “234.b” where 234 is the build version and b can be d,
b or r where d stands for development, b for beta and r for release.
The software version is also briefly displayed when the unit is switched on.
The unit’s behaviour, features and functions depend completely on the installed software.
Always use the latest software available, especially if you notice that some features that
are described in the available documentation are missing from the software.
Some new instruments or retrofittable extensions might require MCU software upgrades. If
so, the unit will automatically display respective help or error codes.

Chapter D: SERVICE MODE 3 SERVICE MODE DETAILED DESCRIPTION
n 2 Show internal unregulated operating voltage

This voltage reflects the mains voltage magnitude. The nominal value is +33VDC and is
allowed to vary ±15% (28...38V) without affecting the normal operation of the unit.
If one of the MCB electronics fuses has blown (see LED indicators on the MCB), the
displayed voltage will be different from 33VDC ±15%. If the internal voltage is too low or
too high, the unit will show respective error codes. If the voltage rises above 44VDC (a
heavy mains surge, too high mains voltage, wrong voltage jumper position or wrong
transformer primary wiring), an internal protection circuitry will blow fuses, protecting the
unit electronics from failure.
n 3 Show output current of IPS

This is the output current of the instrument power supply (IPS) located on the MCB. IPS
feeds power to micromotors, light-curing bulbs and scaler units. This built-in ampere meter
is intended for checking the current consumption of the selected instrument. If the current
is continuously zero, it indicates an open circuit somewhere between the MCB and the
instrument. This mode is also good for checking the no-load current of micromotors, that is
a direct indication of the motor condition.
n 4 Show output voltage of IPS

This is the output voltage of the instrument power supply (IPS) located on the MCB. IPS
feeds all micromotors, light-curing bulbs and scaler units with appropriate voltages. The
voltage on the display is measured directly at the IPS output on the MCB, and therefore,
the voltage displayed is normally somewhat higher than that which the instrument
receives. However, the voltage drop in the cabling is compensated for so that instruments
always receive a proper voltage.
n.5 Show scaler electronics ID-code

The (optionally) installed scaler electronics module is identified by a jumper wire on its
connector that plugs to the MCB or at the IMUX. It is important for the MCB to know the
type of scaler electronics installed. This service mode allows you to check which type of
scaler electronics are installed and that the identification works properly.
The location of the scaler electronics is indicated on the display by pressing the Set button
with delay. If (--n-) is displayed, the electronics are connected to the IMUX, and if (---n) is
displayed, the electronics are connected to the MCB.
0 = No scaler electronics module installed
1 = LM/AMDENT scaler module installed
2 = EMS scaler module installed
3 = Satelec scaler module installed
4 = EMS No Pain scaler module installed
6 = Satelec Newtron / Satelec Newtron LED scaler module installed
5, 7 reserved
n 6 Show service door switch signal

This is the signal from the microswitch that indicates the door status (0 = door closed, 1 =
door open). An open circuit, broken wire or loose connector is interpreted as the door
would be continuously open. During this condition the chair cannot be run, except for in
the service mode when the control system temporarily ignores this signal.

n 7 Show mains frequency

The unit needs reasonably stable electricity in order to operate properly.
A steady mains frequency should be in between 47...63 Hz. If the frequency fluctuates
significantly, the unit may have difficulty driving the chair and lift motors. In that case, an
electrician should check the quality of the power supplied to the unit.
n 8 Show (optional) assistant syringe hose ID

If no hose is connected (or if the assistant syringe option is not installed), the display
should show a dash (-). If any other instrument than a syringe is connected, the display
should show 0 (zero). If a valid syringe (hose) is connected, the display shows the syringe
hose ID-code (e.g. 20).
n 9 Show (optional) assistant syringe hose sense signal

Same as in service mode 8, but this is the direct signal from the assistant syringe hose
identification circuitry. The display range is 0 - 255. 255 indicates an open circuit, 0
indicates a short, and any other values represent the signal. The display should be fully
stable within one digit.
n 10 Show MCB heatsink temperature

The temperature is measured inside the black aluminium block on the MCB. During
normal circumstances the temperature should stay below 55°C. The temperature can rise
above this level, if the fixing screws (that attach the heatsink to the aluminium box) are
missing. To protect against overheating, the CPU turns off those loads that contribute to
the power dissipation (OP-light and IPS) when the temperature rises above 60°C. An error
is then also displayed.
Does not apply to Compact i Touch v2.0
n.11 Enable (optional) water heater

The purpose of this mode is to guarantee that the (optional) water heater is not powered
up without water. When the unit is shipped from the factory the mode is set to 0 (heater
off). During the installation (but after the water and drain is connected) this mode should
be set to 1 (if there is a water heater attached). When the mode is set to 1, water will be
flown from the cup fill for 10 seconds.
n.12 Set main air valve operation

The main air valve operation can be set to 0 = always closed, 1 = always open or A =
automatic (default). Setting 1 can be used with Metasys WEK, otherwise set to A
(automatic).
n.13 Set main water valve operation

The main water valve operation can be set to 0 = always closed, 1 = always open or A =
automatic (default). Setting 1 can be used with Metasys WEK, otherwise set to A
(automatic).

n.14 Disable automatic functions in rinsing position

This service mode can be used to disable automatic bowl rinse and cup fill functions when
using the chair’s rinsing position.
0 = No water to cup or bowl
1 = Bowl rinse only
2 = Cup fill only
3 = Cup fill and bowl rinse
Factory default = 3
n.15 Disable error messages

This service mode can be used to disable the error message display system. The only use
for this mode is during exhibitions or in showrooms where a full installation is not possible
(no water and/or water pressure), and because of this error messages would be
continuously displayed. Set the mode to 0 to disable the error messages, or to 1 to enable
the error messages (factory default), or to 2 to disable the error messages related to the
console arm. The unit shows shortly H 12 when turning the power on (reminder of that the
error messages are disabled).
n.16 Enable factory preset mode

This service mode is used to set the unit to a predefined state using only a few keystrokes.
This feature is mainly used at the factory; that is why it is called a “factory preset”. All user
programmable settings and parameters, as well as the most important service mode
settings can be set to a “normal” state. In this way, the unit can be immediately operated
without first having to do some adjustments or programming. This is useful also on the
field if a showroom unit is later installed for clinical use.
Upon entry this service mode shows a dash (-) on the display. Press the SET button so
that the yellow indicator light on the button is lit. The display now shows S U. (If you do not
have a touch panel, press the S-button to display S U.)
Performing user mode presets
Press the plus (+) button briefly (or the B-button if you do not have a touch panel) to
perform the user mode presets (the display shows FP.U during the process). Pressing the
plus (+) button sets the factory presets for the user-controlled settings, which are: period of
cup filling, period of bowl rinsing, period of door open/assistant call, automatic chair
positions for each dentist (backrest, height, OP-light), timer settings, intensity of the OP-
light and instrument settings (spray, power reduction, chip blow etc.). After performing the
user mode presets the text “turn off” will flash on the display. Now turn off the unit.
Performing service mode presets
Press the minus (-) button briefly (or the A-button if you do not have a touch panel) to
perform the service mode presets (the display shows FP.S during the process). Pressing
the minus (-) button sets the factory presets for all the service mode settings. After
performing the service mode presets the text “turn off” will flash on the display. Now turn
off the unit.
When you have set the factory presets for all service modes and the dental unit
configuration differs from the software factory preset values, you must edit the service
modes to suit the dental unit configuration. Check, for example, the values for service
modes n.83, n.84, n.100 and n.133.

n.17 Select display units for pressures and temperature

In this mode you can select whether the unit displays the pressures (in the service modes)
in either bar, kPa or PSI. For PSI, you can additionally select between Fahrenheit and
Celsius.
1 = bar (n.nn) and Celsius (default)
2 = kPa (nnn) and Celsius
3 = PSI (nn.n) and Fahrenheit
4 = PSI (nn.n) and Celsius
n.18 Factory test

Reserved for factory use.
3.2 Instrument MUX
n 19 Show software version of IMUX CPU

This is the software version of the IMUX.
n 20 Show instrument holder and AUX-input signals

This service mode is convenient for checking the proper operation of the balanced arm
sensors (on the IMUX PCB). The 5 rightmost segments represent the 5 instrument
positions, from right to left respectively. A short vertical bar indicates that the instrument is
in its place on the instrument console, a long vertical bar that it has been picked up from
the console. The leftmost vertical bar shows the signal at the AUX input terminal on the
IMUX PCB (6th instrument place).
n.21 Show active instrument hose ID-code

This mode is convenient for checking the instrument hose ID-code and the related
electronics on the IMUX PCB. Value 0 means that no hose is connected.
The display shows four dashes (----) if no instrument is selected. Activate a properly
attached instrument hose (in this same location) to display the ID-code. The code
displayed should be the same as indicated by the last digit(s) on the label on the quick
connector.
n 22 Show active instrument hose identification signal

This service mode is similar to service mode 21. It shows the actual signal measured from
the identification pins on the instrument hose quick connector. The signal range is 0 to
510.
The display should show 223 to 228 when no instrument is selected (the electronics
measure a local reference signal). If the signal is outside this range, there is an error on
the IMUX PCB. Check for any water leakage.
Activate a properly attached instrument hose (in this same location) to display the
identification signal.
n 23 Show active instrument switch/sensor signal

This service mode shows the instrument (optional) switch or sensor input signal. The
display shows four dashes (----) if no instrument is selected. The display range is 0 to 255.
Activate a properly attached instrument hose (in this same location) to display the ID-code.

n 24 Show console syringe location hose ID-code

This service mode shows the hose ID-code for the hose connected to the syringe location.
The display shows zero (0) if no hose is attached, otherwise the hose ID-code is displayed
continuously.
n 25 Show console syringe location hose identification signal

This service mode is similar to service mode 24. It shows the actual signal measured from
the identification pins on the connected hose. The display range is 0 to 255. A continuous
255 indicates an open circuit, a continuous 0 a short. The signal should be stable within ±1
digit.
n 26 Show console syringe switch signal

This service mode shows the (optional) switch signal from the syringe. At this moment no
syringes use this signal, therefore 255 is always displayed.
n 27 Show IMUX on/off valve signals

This service mode shows the actual driver output signals controlling the on/off type
electromagnetic valves inside the IMUX. The five first vertical segments (counting from
right) represent the four instrument and one syringe select valves, respectively.
The sixth (leftmost) vertical bar shows the (optional) steripump control valve / extra water
valve signal.
A short vertical bar indicates that the valve is off and that the valve is connected properly
(not open circuited). A long vertical bar indicates that either the valve is on or that the valve
is open circuited.
When the SET-mode is entered, IMUX output signal feedback inputs are displayed: 1st
vertical segment (counting from right): Syringe water control 2nd: Instrument 4 membrane
control valve 3rd: Instrument 3 membrane control valve 4th: Instrument 2 membrane
control valve 5th: Instrument 1 membrane control valve 6th: Steripump control valve /
extra water valve 7th: Syringe fibre light electronics 8th: Syringe heater
n 28 Show IMUX other output signals

For factory use.
n 29 Show air / water pressure difference

This service mode shows the measured pressure difference between the internal
continuous air pressure and the regulated spray water fed to the instruments. This
pressure difference should always be greater than 1 bar (100kPa) to guarantee proper
operation.
n 30 Show active instrument drive/cooling air pressure

This service mode shows the signal from the drive/cooling air line pressure sensor. The
display is either in bar, kPa or PSI, depending on the setting in service mode 17. The
pressure is measured inside the IMUX, just after the proportional valve controlling this line.
Therefore, this pressure display is (under normal flow conditions) always higher than the
pressure measured at the instrument end of the hose.

n.31 Select the service mode navigation type

This service mode lets you select the service mode navigation type.
0 = Normal navigation. The service mode number is changed in steps of one when using
the plus (+) and minus (-) buttons on the touch panel.
1 = Factory use
2 = Accelerated navigation. The service mode number is changed in steps of 5 when using
the plus (+) and minus (-) buttons on the touch panel.
3 = Factory use
The factory default is 2.
Note: If your dental unit is not equipped with a touch panel, you can scroll through the
service mode numbers using the A and B buttons.
n 32 Show active instrument spray air pressure

This service mode shows the signal from the spray/chip air line pressure sensor. The
Therefore, the pressure measured (under normal flow conditions) is always higher than
this same pressure measured at the instrument end of the hose.
n.33 Factory test

For factory use.
n 34 Show active instrument spray water pressure

This service mode shows the signal from the spray water line pressure sensor. The
Therefore, the pressure measured (under normal flow conditions) is always higher than
this same pressure measured at the instrument end of the hose. Because of the
construction of the water channel the pressure drops very slowly towards 0 (zero).
n.35 Factory test

For factory use.
n.36 Set mode of IMUX membrane operation

This service mode selects the mode of operation of the IMUX instrument select membrane
control valves. The unit software must be upgraded, if mode 1 is not available and needs
to be used. This feature was added to software version 1.23 (and later).
Mode 0 is recommended to be selected in older units with IMUX assemblies manufactured
earlier than Jan. -96. In this mode all instrument select membranes stay open whenever
possible (not pressurised). Then prevention of water dropping from the instruments (when
idle) is fully dependent of the operation of the integral back pressure valves.
Mode 1 is recommended to be selected in new units, since in this mode all instrument
select membranes in the IMUX will stay normally closed (pressurised). The benefit is that
there is no risk of water leakage or occasional water drops from the instruments. In this
mode the integral spray water back pressure valves are only needed when the unit is
powered off. This continuous activation of the (4) valves causes some additional heat
dissipation in the IMUX (about 8W). Early IMUX assemblies have not been tested with this
higher power dissipation and could give problems (due to some tight tolerances) with
sticking balanced arm pins. Assuming that the pins are replaced with thinner ones, mode 1
can be used in all IMUXes.

Does not apply to Compact i Touch v2.
n.37 Disable turbine contamination prevention system

This service mode can be used to disable the software controlled turbine contamination
prevention system. It is recommended to keep this mode turned on (1) at all times to
guarantee maximum turbine hygiene.
Set this mode temporarily to 0 (zero) if you want to compare or demonstrate the difference
in turbine performance. This demonstration should be done with the turbine connected to
an instrument location not having a built in CP (contamination prevention) valve (no label
close to the IMUX quick connector).
The turbine contamination prevention system is based on a sophisticated software
algorithm that controls the turbine in such a way that the turbine head can never produce
vacuum, therefore minimising the risk of contaminating the turbine or the turbine quick-
connector.
n 38 Show internal water or air pressure

This service mode can be used to check the internal water and air pressures.
Checking the air pressure (An.nn bar; Annn kPa; Ann.n PSI)
Press the minus (-) button (or the A-button if you do not have a touch panel) to enter the
air pressure measurement mode. The display shows the air pressure either in bar, kPa or
PSI (depending on the setting in service mode 17). The display stabilises within a few
seconds. The static air pressure should be 5.5 bar (550 kPa).
Checking the water pressure (Hn.nn bar; Hnnn kPa; Hnn.n PSI)
Press the plus (+) button (or the B-button if you do not have a touch panel) to enter the
water pressure measurement mode. The display shows the water pressure either in bar,
kPa or PSI (depending on the setting in service mode 17). The display stabilises within a
few seconds. The static water pressure should be 2.5 to 2.8 bar (250 to 280 kPa).
Note: Make sure that there is at least one water consuming instrument hose connected
before performing the water pressure measurement (a scaler, turbine or micromotor
hose). Leaving the water pressure measurement mode causes the unit to turn off valves in
the console, resulting in a small amount of water (a few drops) flowing out from the IMUX.
This behaviour is fully normal and is due to the way the measurement is performed (using
the spray water line sensor).
3.3 Instrument
n.39 Set maximum fibre optic and Intracam bulb voltage for
selected hose type
This service mode can be used to fine adjust the maximum allowed fibre-optic light bulb
voltage for the selected hose type. The display shows four dashes (----) if no valid hose is
selected. When a hose (instrument) that contains a fibre-optic light is selected, the display
shows the setting for this hose type. The factory default is 170. Positive values increase,
negative decrease the factory default. Each step equals about 50mV. Determine the bulb
voltage by measuring it directly at the bulb socket when the bulb is on. Never exceed the
maximum allowed voltage.
Satelec Newtron LED: Set value to the maximum value = 170.
Note: The dental unit can be equipped with 2 or more scalers, but they must be of the
same type. Two different types of scaler can not be supported simultaneously.

Note: If the Satelec LED scaler is replaced by the Satelec Lux (halogen scaler) the service
mode value must be set to 0 (halogen light) while the Satelec LED is still attached to the
dental unit.
n.40 Fine-adjust bulb voltage for selected polymerisation light

This service mode can be used to fine adjust the polymerisation light bulb voltage. The
display shows four dashes (----) if no valid polymerisation light is selected. The factory
default is 0 (zero). Positive values increase, negative decrease the factory default. Each
step equals about 50mV. Determine the bulb voltage by measuring it directly at the bulb
socket when the bulb is on. Never adjust the voltage higher or lower than rated.
n.41 Set fibre optic light turn-off delay for all instruments
This service mode can be used to alter the turn-off delay for instruments with an internal
fibrelight. The factory default is 30 seconds.
n.42 Fine-adjust cooling air pressure for selected hose type

This service mode can be used to fine adjust the cooling air pressure (flow rate) to the
selected hose (instrument) type. The display shows four dashes (----) if no valid hose is
selected. Valid hoses are all micromotors, polymerisation lights without a built-in fan (e.g.
Satelec) and IntraCam. The factory default is 0 (zero). Positive values increase, negative
decrease the factory default. Using too little air could overheat the instrument. Using too
much air can cause other problems (light guides or handpieces popping off).
n.43 Set mode of foot controlled chip-blow

This service mode can be used to alter the behaviour of the manual (foot controlled) chip
blow. The factory default is 1.
Value 1 means that the manual chip blow is air-only (dry), independent of the instrument
automatic chip blow water/air flow setting. Value 0 causes the manual chip blow to behave
in the same way as the automatic one.
n.44 Fine-adjust drive air pressure for selected hose type

This service mode can be used to fine adjust the air driven instrument's maximum drive air
pressure for the selected hose (instrument) type. The display shows four dashes (----) if no
valid hose is selected. Valid hoses are all turbine- and air-motor hoses. The factory default
is 0 (zero). Positive values increase, negative decrease the factory default.
3.4 Control panel
n.45 Show control panel type/AUX input for branch 1

This service mode shows the type of the control panel connected to MCB branch 1
(normally the dentist's control panel). A dash (-) indicates either that no control panel is
connected to this branch, the cable to the panel is loose or faulty, or that the panel itself
does not respond. The numbers 0 - 3 show that the panel is communicating with the MCB.
0 = assistant’s control panel with PlusPackage
1 = dentist’s control panel
2 = assistant’s control panel
3 = dentist’s control panel with PlusPackage / CP2 control panel / touch panel.

n.46 Show control panel type/AUX input for branch 2

This service mode shows the type of the control panel connected to MCB branch 2. See
explanation for service mode 45.
n 47 Show control panel button code for branch 1. Not applicable

for touch panel
This service mode is applicable to control panel CP1 only.
The service mode shows which button is pressed on the control panel connected to MCB
branch 1 (normally the dentist's control panel). The digit left of the decimal point indicates
the row, the one to the right indicates the column.
n 48 Show control panel button code for branch 2. Not applicable

for touch panel
This service mode is applicable to control panel CP1 only.
The service mode shows which button is pressed on the control panel connected to MCB
branch 2. See explanation for service mode 47.
n.49 Display test for Planmeca Compact i 2009 control panel. Not
applicable for touch panel
This service mode is not applicable to the touch panel.
The service mode turns on all individual LEDs and display segments on the control
panel(s) (Planmeca Compact i 2009 control panel). Can be used to check that all displays
work properly, as well as to check the control panel for dead pixels. Shows also the
version number of the control panel software.
3.5 Suction holder
n 50 Show suction holder type and status for branch 1

This service mode shows the suction holder's sensor statuses and sensor PCB status
connected to MCB branch 1 (normally the suction holder in the dentist's console). The
three (3) rightmost vertical bars represent the sensor statuses (tube in/out) of the three
tube sensors. The fourth (leftmost) vertical bar shows the signal from the optional AUX
input on the sensor PCB (reserved for future use).
A dash (-) to the left of the vertical bars indicates either that no suction tube holder is
connected to this branch, that the cable to the tube sensor PCB is loose or faulty, or that
the sensor PCB itself does not respond. Value 1 - 3 on the left side of the vertical bars
indicates that the sensor PCB is detected and operational.
Value:
- = No holder
1 = Holder detected
2 = Classic holder detected
3 = Flexy holder detected
n 51 Show suction holder type and status for branch 2

This service mode shows the suction holder’s sensor statuses and sensor PCB status
connected to MCB branch 2 (normally the assistant's suction holder). See the explanation
for service mode 50.

n 52 Show left (high-volume) suction sensor signal for branch 1

This is the direct sensor signal from the high-volume tube sensor (leftmost) on the suction
tube sensor PCB connected to MCB branch 1 (the dentist's console suction tube holder).
Flexy-holder:
The display range is 0 to 255. When a suction tube is in the holder, the signal should be
within the range 100 - 255. When no tube is in the holder, the signal should be within the
range 25 - 195. The signal level difference should be at least 60 points when the suction
tube is removed from the holder and returned to the holder.
Other suction holders:

n 53 Show middle (saliva) suction sensor signal for branch 1

This is the direct sensor signal from the saliva suction tube sensor (middle) on the suction
tube sensor PCB connected to MCB branch 1 (normally the dentist's console suction tube
holder). See service mode 52 for further information.
n 54 Show right (ejector) suction sensor signal for branch 1

This is the direct sensor signal from the ejector/assistant syringe sensor (right) on the
suction tube sensor PCB connected to MCB branch 1 (normally the dentist's console
suction tube holder). See service mode 52 for further information.
n 55 Show AUX input signal for branch 1

This is the AUX input signal on the suction tube sensor PCB connected to MCB branch 1
(normally the dentist's console suction tube holder). This signal is reserved for future use
and always displays 255. AUX input is not available in the Flexy-holder.
n 56 Show left (high volume) suction sensor signal for branch 2

This is the direct sensor signal from the high-volume tube sensor (leftmost) on the suction
tube sensor PCB connected to MCB branch 2 (normally the assistant's suction tube
holder).
Flexy-holder:
Other suction holders:


n 57 Show middle (saliva) suction sensor signal for branch 2

This is the direct sensor signal from the saliva suction tube sensor (middle) on the suction
tube sensor PCB connected to MCB branch 2 (normally the assistant's suction tube
holder). See service mode 56 for further information.
n 58 Show right (ejector) suction sensor signal for branch 2

This is the direct sensor signal from the ejector/assistant syringe sensor (right) on the
suction tube sensor PCB connected to MCB branch 2 (normally the assistant's suction
tube holder). See service mode 56 for further information.
n.59 Show AUX input signal for branch 2

This is the AUX input signal on the suction tube sensor PCB connected to MCB branch 2
(normally the assistant's suction tube holder). This signal is reserved for future use and
always displays 255. AUX input is not available in the Flexy-holder.
3.6 Foot control
n 60 Show software version of foot control

Shows the software version of the foot control.
n 61 Show foot control switch signals

This service mode displays all digital input signals in the foot control. A short vertical bar
indicates an off state (no signal / no jumper), a long vertical bar indicates an on state
(signal / jumper).
The four right-hand bars correspond to the chair A, B, C, D signals.
The three left-hand bars correspond to the jumper A, jumper B, AUX inputs (only to
Compact i 2009 and older).
Jumpers A and B are optional (not needed) in the Prostyle Compact unit. The AUX input is
reserved for future use. Chair A, B, C, D signals are convenient for checking the proper
operation of the chair control knob, its magnet and HALL-sensors.
n 62 Show pedal horizontal position coordinate

This service mode displays the horizontal position of the foot control pedal. The display
range is from -255 to 255. The display must be 0 (zero) when the pedal is in the middle
(rest position). Moving the pedal sideways ±6 mm should still produce 0 (zero) on the
display. Bringing the pedal to about 5mm from the left side extreme (mechanical stop)
should show -255 on the display. Likewise, bringing the pedal 5 mm from the right extreme
should show 255 on the display. Pushing the pedal down during this test should not
change the display more than ±15%.
Perform the foot control calibration as described in section "Calibrating foot control" of this
manual, if the values described above cannot be achieved.
If the values cannot still be achieved, adjust the height of the foot control pedal as
described in section "Adjusting height of the foot control pedal".

n 63 Show pedal vertical position coordinate

This service mode displays the vertical position of the foot control pedal. Pushing the
pedal down changes the display sign (positive/negative).
The range of the value should be from 64 (top position) to -64 (bottom position).
In Compact i 2009 and older the display range is -100 to 100. Both extremes (pedal idle /
pedal pushed down) should be symmetrical within 20%. A typical idle value is 50 to 80.
Perform the foot control calibration as described in section "Calibrating foot control", if the
values described above cannot be achieved.
If the values cannot still be achieved, adjust the height of the foot control pedal as
described in section "Adjusting height of the foot control pedal".
n 64 Show left-side sensor signal (unprocessed)

This service mode shows the direct signal of the pedal position (left-side sensor). When
the pedal is in the middle (idle) position, the value should be within the range 3000 - 7000.
The sensor plate under the foot control PCB is too far from the PCB if the number is
smaller than 3000. During this condition, it could be impossible to properly calibrate the
foot control. The proper distance between the plate and the bottom surface of the PCB is
0.5 mm (±0.1 mm). Under no circumstances should the plate be allowed to come in
contact with the PCB.
Applies only to Compact i 2009 and older.
n 65 Show right-side sensor signal (unprocessed)

This service mode shows the direct signal of the pedal position (right-side sensor). See
service mode n 64 for further information.
Applies only to Compact i 2009 and older.
n.66 Select foot control pedal operation mode

This service mode can be used to select the foot control pedal instrument control mode.
Mode 0 is normal pedal operation (default). The instruments are controlled with horizontal
pedal movements. The direction of the micromotor rotation is forward when moving the
foot control pedal to both directions.
In mode 1, the instruments are controlled with vertical pedal movements. The instrument
spray is switched on and off by moving the pedal to the left. The manual chip blow is
activated by moving the pedal to the right. Other functions work normally. If you use this
mode and change the pedal knob, you must calibrate the foot control after you have
installed the wide pedal. For instructions, see section "Calibrating foot control" in this
manual.
In mode 2, the instruments are controlled with horizontal pedal movements, and the
reversing of the micromotor rotation is done with the foot control as follows. To operate the
micromotor normally (in a forward direction), push the pedal to the left. To reverse the
direction of rotation, push the pedal to the right. Note, that the Reverse rotation button on
the touch panel does not function in this mode.
In mode 3 the instruments are controlled with horizontal pedal movements, and the
reversing of the micromotor rotation is done with the foot control as follows. To operate the
micromotor normally (in a forward direction), push the pedal to the right. To reverse the
direction of rotation, push the pedal to the left. Note, that the Reverse rotation button on
the touch panel does not function in this mode.
In mode 4, the power limitation selection is done with the foot control for all instruments.
Limited power right and full power left.

n.67 Disable foot control pedal extra functions

This service mode can be used to disable the foot control pedal extra functions.
Value 0 (zero) removes ALL extra features. Then the foot control pedal can be used only
to control the instruments.
Value 1 (one, factory default) enables all possible pedal functions. This currently includes;
EXT- function control (nurse call/door open/table instrument control), cup filling + bowl
rinsing, and patient chair rinsing position control.
n.68 Disable automatic chair positions (A, B, C, D, S) from foot

control centre knob and right side knob
This service mode can be used to disable the foot controlled pre-programmed chair
positions.
Value 0 disables these automatic functions from the centre knob (chair control knob on the
old foot control) and right side knob. With this option, the centre knob only operates the
chair manually (backrest up/down, chair up/down).
Value 1 (factory default) enables the automatic chair position control (short activation of
the knob drives the chair to a pre-programmed position).
Value 2 disables both automatic and manual chair controls.
n.69 Momentary spray mode / spray with foot control mode

This service mode can be used to enable the momentary spray and instrument spray
setting toggling with the foot control. The momentary spray can either be totally disabled or
momentary spray water can be switched off. Selecting the instrument spray setting with
the foot control can also be disabled in this service mode, in which case the spray type can
only be selected from the touch panel.
Note: The momentary spray is activated when the pedal is pressed down while driving the
instrument. (This feature is only available for the standard pedal.)
Note: For scalers the momentary spray is always with water regardless of this service
mode setting.
0 = Momentary spray enabled, momentary spray water off, instrument spray setting can
be toggled with foot control
1 = Momentary spray enabled, momentary spray water on, instrument spray setting can
be toggled with foot control
2 = Momentary spray enabled, momentary spray water off, instrument spray setting can
not be toggled with foot control
3 = Momentary spray enabled, momentary spray water on, instrument spray setting can
not be toggled with foot control
4 = Momentary spray disabled, instrument spray setting can be toggled with foot control
(default)
5 = Factory use
6 = Momentary spray disabled, instrument spray setting can not be toggled with foot
control
7 = Factory use

3.7 Operating light
n 70 Show OP-light button signal

This service mode can be used to check the operation of the operating light (Delight)
push-button. The display should show 0 (zero) when the button is released (open circuit)
and 1 (one) when the button is pressed (short circuit).
n.71 Set OP-light maximum voltage

This service mode adjusts the maximum allowed voltage (Vrms) to the operating light
bulb. The factory default is 18.5 (volts) that is valid for the Planmeca Delight operating
light, when directly installed to the unit. Using this service mode it is easy to adapt the unit
to any type of light as long as the maximum load ratings (24V, 150W bulb) are not
exceeded. The voltage drop in long rungs of wire (if the light is fed by the unit electronics,
but assembled to the ceiling) can be compensated for within certain limits. Use a true RMS
voltage meter and check the actual voltage directly at the bulb socket if the installation
differs from the standard (direct unit installation of Delight).
n.72 Disable OP-light automatic turn off/on with chair

When the value of this service mode is set to 0 (zero), the automatic turn off/on of the
operating light when recalling pre-programmed chair positions is disabled. To enable this
function, set the value to 1 (one) (factory default).
n.73 Disable OP-light automatic dimming with instrument console

polymerisation lights (not polymerisation light in suction holder)
This service mode can be used to disable the automatic dimming of the operating light
when handling the (optional) polymerisation light handpieces.
Set the value to 0 (zero) for fully independent operation.
Value 1 (one, factory default) enables the dimming feature and the light returns to initial
brightness when the polymerisation cycle is stopped.
Value 2 (two) allows the dimming; the light returns to the initial brightness when another
instrument is selected or the operating light button on the control panel is pressed.
n.74 Disable OP-light dimming function from its button

This service mode can be used to disable the automatic dimming of the operating light.
Set the value to 0 (zero) to disable the dimming function from the OP-light push-button.
Value 1 (one, factory default) enables the dimming feature when pressing and holding
down either the operating light push-button or the control panel button.
Value 2 (two) disables the dimming function from the control panel button.
Value 3 (three) disables the OP-light dimming function.

3.8 Patient chair
n 75 Show safety switch signal

This service mode is used to check the proper operation of the safety switch under the
chair bottom. The display should normally show 0 (zero) if nothing is touching the plate
(switch closed) and the cable and connectors are OK. Pushing the plate upwards must
change the display to 1 (one) (switch opens). A continuous open circuit in the cables (or a
short from either of the safety switch signal cables to the chassis) would also cause the
display to show 1 (one).
n.76 Show lift mechanism position sensor signal

This service mode shows the signal from the multi-turn potentiometer that is used as a
position sensor for the lift mechanism. This potentiometer is mounted directly to the motor,
very close to where the worm-screw axle exits the gearbox. The display range is 0 to 255.
Driving the mechanism up increments the number, driving the mechanism down
decrements the number. The displayed number should be stable within ±1 digit when not
driving the chair. The control system refuses to drive the motor (in the respective direction)
if the signal is under 25 or above 240.
n.77 Show backrest mechanism position sensor signal

This service mode shows the signal from the multi-turn potentiometer that is used as a
position sensor for the backrest mechanism. This potentiometer is mounted directly to the
motor, very close to where the worm-screw axle exits the gearbox. The display range is 0
to 255. Driving the backrest up increments the number, driving the backrest down
decrements the number. The displayed number should be stable within ±1 digit when not
driving the chair. The control system refuses to drive the motor (in the respective direction)
if the signal is under 1 or above 240.
n.78 Select rinsing position function mode

This service mode is used to select the rinsing position function mode.
0 = The previous working position is stored into memory when the chair is driven from the
rinsing position to an automatic position (A, B, C or D) and the Rinsing position indicator
light remains on. When the Rinsing position button is pressed again, the chair will move
back to the position in which it was when you first pressed the Rinsing position button.
(Default)
1 = The previous working position is cleared from the memory when the chair is driven
from the rinsing position to an automatic position (A, B, C or D) and the Rinsing position
indicator light goes off. When the Rinsing position button is pressed again, the chair will
move again to the rinsing position. Select this option when using the rinsing position as an
exit position. Note that changing the chair’s position in a non-automatic mode will not clear
the previous working position from the unit’s memory.

n.79 Lift mechanism position sensor calibration mode

This service mode is used to calibrate the lift mechanism potentiometer. This needs to be
performed if the potentiometer is loosened from the motor or if the motor is replaced.
Press the SET button until the LED on the button lights (or press the S-button if you do not
have a touch panel). Use the minus (-) and plus (+) buttons to first align the mechanism
(use the A and B buttons instead, if you do not have a touch panel). Loosen the
potentiometer cogwheel and turn the potentiometer axle until the segments align on the
display. Tighten the cogwheel. For more detailed calibration instructions, see section
"Calibrating lift motor position sensor". Note that during the calibration of the lift motor
position sensor all software limits are ignored. Special care must be taken so that the unit
is not damaged by driving the lifting adapter to its mechanical limits.
n.80 Backrest mechanism position sensor calibration mode

This service mode is used to calibrate the backrest potentiometer. This needs to be
performed if the potentiometer is loosened from the motor or if the motor is replaced.
Press the SET button until the LED on the button lights (or press the S-button if you do not
have a touch panel). Use the minus (-) and plus (+) buttons to first align the two marks in
the mechanism use the A and B buttons instead, if you do not have a touch panel). Loosen
the potentiometer cogwheel and turn the potentiometer axle until the segments align on
the display. Tighten the cogwheel. For more detailed calibration instructions, see section
"Calibrating backrest motor position sensor".
Note that during the calibration of the backrest motor position sensor all software limits are
ignored. Special care must be taken so that the unit is not damaged by driving the
backrest to its mechanical limits.
3.9 Separator and suction system
n 81 Show type of installed suction system

This service mode displays the type of installed separator system (if any). The type of the
separator system is automatically determined by the type of separator cable connected to
the MCB (jumper wires).
0 = wet suction system or no separator system installed
1 = Microvac II dry suction system separator (manufactured by Planmeca, no amalgam
separation) or Dürr CS1 (manufactured by Dürr, no amalgam separation)
2 = Dürr CAS1 or Dürr Combisep amalgam separator (manufactured by Dürr, centrifugal
amalgam separation)
3 = Metasys (manufactured by Metasys, centrifugal amalgam separation)
4 = Dürr VS/A suction motor/amalgam separator combination (stand alone system)
5 = Planmeca VS/A suction motor/amalgam separator combination
6, 7 = reserved
n.82 Set suction motor turn-off delay

This service mode sets the turn-off delay for the suction motor controlled (optionally) by
the unit. The factory default is 3 seconds. This turn-off delay protects the suction motor
from repeated start/stop cycles. Setting the value to "Cont" (continuous) starts the suction
motor immediately when the unit is turned on, and turns off the motor automatically when
the unit is turned off. Any other setting keeps the suction motor running as long as
indicated, after the suction tubes are put back to their holders.
The turn-off delay for the suction tubes is used also for the Dürr spittoon bowl valve.

n.83 Set number of suction tubes / disable suction system

This service mode tells the unit how many simultaneous suction tubes are installed in the
unit. The unit needs to know this detail so it can determine when to turn off the suction
system and the suction motor. The following settings are possible:
0 = No suction system installed (no suction tubes, ignores all related possible error
messages) (used also with independent suction system)
1 = One suction tube only
2 = Two suction tubes (factory default)
3 = Three suction tubes (mainly USA, using extra T-branch adapter)
n.84 Set type of extra assistant instrument

Use this service mode to set the type of the (optional) installed assistant instrument
(rightmost location in the suction holder and additional holders).
0 = No extra assistant instrument (this location in the holder is available for a suction tube)
1 = Assistant’s syringe installed
2 = Water operated saliva ejector installed
3 = Assistant syringe and water operated saliva ejector installed
4 = Polymerisation light
5 = Assistant’s syringe and polymerisation light
6 = Water operated saliva ejector and polymerisation light
7 = Assistant’s syringe, water operated saliva ejector and polymerisation light
This service mode is also affected automatically by the service mode factory preset.
3.10 Direct I/O
n 85 Output signals
1st vertical segment (counting from right): WMS use, see service mode 126
2nd: Not in use
3rd: Saliva suction selective valve
4th: High-volume suction selective valve
5th: Intracam activated
6th: Microvac pulse valve
7th: Main water valve
8th: Cup fill valve
n 86 Output signals
1st vertical segment (counting from right): Assistant syringe water valve
2nd: Assistant syringe heater
3rd: Metasys/Dürr error acknowledge signal or Dürr VSA rinse valve
4th: Metasys/Microvac/Dürr start signal or Dürr VSA/Wet suction valve
5th: Water flush to suction system
6th: Ejector control
7th: Bowl rinse control
8th: Main air valve

n 87 Driver signals
1st vertical segment (counting from right): Power source control
2nd: Beeper control
3rd: Boiler control
4th: Assistant call / door open / Intracam control relay
5th: Suction motor relay
6th: Backrest movement reversion relay
7th: Lift motor movement reversion relay
8th: Instrument reverse rotation
n 88 Driver signals
1st vertical segment (counting from right): Scaler electronics activated
2nd: Status LED / Run LED control
3rd: Factory use
4th: Factory use
5th: Not in use
6th: Not in use
7th: Not in use
8th: Not in use
n 89 Input signals
1st vertical segment (counting from right): Microvac overfill error
2nd: Metasys/Dürr functional
3rd: Metasys/Dürr separator alarm or Dürr VSA float reed relay signal
4th: Factory use
5th: Operating light switch
6th: Cuspidor door switch
7th: Metasys separator beeper
8th: Factory use
n 90 Input signals
1st vertical segment (counting from right): Scaler electronics selection 1
2nd: Scaler electronics selection 2
3rd: Scaler electronics selection 3
7th: WCS container recognition
8th: Patient cup fill button

n 91 Outputs
1st vertical segment (counting from right): Not in use
2nd: Not in use
3rd: Backrest motor control
4th: Lift motor control
5th: Chair control
n 92 Inputs
1st vertical segment (counting from right): Factory use
2nd: Safety switch
3rd: Factory use
3.11 Other
n.93 Adjustment of the duration of the spray water impulse

This service mode can be used to adjust the duration of the spray water impulse. The use
of this water impulse is explained under service mode n 95. The adjustment range is 0 - 20
(corresponds to 0.00 - 1.20 sec.), and the factory default V1 Compact i = 1(60ms), V2
Compact i = 2(120ms).
n.94 Set syringe fibre optic light voltage

This service mode can be used to alter the voltage of the syringe fibre optic light. The
range is 0 - 4 V, and the factory default is 3.7 V.
Applies only to dentist syringe.
n.95 Set spray water impulse pressure

This service mode can be used to adjust the minimum pressure of the spray water
impulse. If you use only a very small amount of spray water there might be a delay in the
spray water flow. However, you can adjust the water impulse pressure so that the spray
water channel is opened immediately to enable the water to flow without delay. After the
opening impulse, the spray water pressure is taken to the value adjusted when
programming the amount of water for spray. The range is 0 - 30, and the factory default is
V1 Compact i = 15 and V2 Compact i = 28.
n.96 RPM display / Enable low speed function for brush

micromotors (optional Plus package)
This service mode can be used to enable/disable the RPM display (instead of percentage
display) as well as the low speed function for brush micromotors.
0 = RPM disabled / low speed function for micromotors disabled
1 = RPM disabled / low speed function for micromotors enabled
2 = RPM enabled / low speed function for micromotors disabled
3 = RPM enabled / low speed function for micromotors enabled

n.97 Set suction system cleaning time

This service mode can be used to adjust the cleaning time for the suction system. The
range is 0 sec. (no flushing) to 20 min, and the factory default is 2 min.
n.98 Select how to freeze Intracam image from foot control

This service mode is used to select how Intracam images are frozen using the old foot
control.
0 = Sideways movement of the pedal has no effect
1 = Pedal movement activates the door open/nurse call relay (video printer freeze)
2 = Pedal movement activates the serial communication connection (2400N81) to Dimaxis
3 = Pedal movement activates both the door open/nurse call relay and the Dimaxis serial
communication (1 + 2).
Note: If the value is set to 2, pushing the pedal to the left will freeze the image, and
pushing it to the left again will unfreeze the image. Pushing the pedal to the right will save
the image. The old foot control also has service modes 4 - 7. They are the same as 0 - 3,
but the pedal operation is vertical.
n.99 Instrument hose flushing operation: disable H 99 message

The user can select either a short or a long instrument hose flushing. Use this service
mode to enable/disable the H 99 message.
In case the long flushing is not performed prior to unit turn-off:
0 = H 99 is not displayed
1 = H 99 will be shown, but the unit can be used without performing the long flushing.
2 = H 99 will be shown and the long flushing must be performed before the unit can be
used.
n.100 Select dental unit type

This service mode is used to select the dental unit type.
Compact i V1: 0 = V1 Prostyle Compact unit without chair
1 = V1 Prostyle Compact unit
2 = V1 Prostyle Compact WE'S unit
3 = V1 Reserved for future use
4 = V1 Planmeca Compact e
5 = V1 Planmeca Compact i without chair / Planmeca Universal / Planmeca Compact i
ceiling-mounted
6 = V1 Planmeca Compact i
7 = V1 Planmeca Compact e with swivel position recognition
8 = V1 Planmeca Compact i unit without chair, connected to Planmeca Chair / Planmeca
Universal / Planmeca Compact i ceiling-mounted, connected to Planmeca Chair
Compact i V2: 11 = V2 Planmeca Compact i without chair

12 = V2 Planmeca Compact i with OP delivery arm
13 = V2 Planmeca Compact i with Side delivery arm

14 = V2 Planmeca Compact i unit without chair, connected to Planmeca Chair

---- = unit type not selected (default)
After replacing the Main PCB, the dental unit automatically enters this service mode when
the unit is switched on. The unit type must be selected before it can be used.
n.101 Waterline cleaning status and interrupt

This service mode shows the status of the waterline cleaning. The operation can be reset
by pressing S-key continuously. Long instrument flushing shall be performed after reset.
Waterline cleaning status:

0 = Normal operation; the waterline cleaning operation is off.
1 - 13 = The waterline cleaning operation is on.
n.102 Disable dry spray mode

This service mode is for disabling dry spray mode from the instruments.
0 = dry spray mode enabled (default)
1 = dry spray mode disabled, Plus package signal tones
2 = dry spray mode disabled, normal signal tones.
n 103 Show the dental unit type

The first digit shows the type of Main PCB:
2 = Planmeca Compact i
The second digit shows the IMUX version:

0 = no IMUX
1 = IMUX PCB version E or older, software 1.05.x or 1.06.x
2 = IMUX PCB version F-G, software 1.08.x
3 = IMUX PCB version F-G, software 1.09.x (1.10.x)
4 = IMUX PCB version H-J, software 1.10.x (1.09.x)
5 = IMUX PCB version H-J, software 1.11.x (1.09.x)
The third digit shows the dental unit type:

0 = Prostyle Compact
1 = Planmeca Compact e
2 = Planmeca Compact i
The fourth digit shows the patient chair type:

0 = no patient chair
1 = Prostyle Compact chair without legrest or legrest up
2 = Prostyle chair with legrest down
3 = WE’S lifter
4 = Planmeca Compact e chair
5 = Planmeca Compact i chair with fixed legrest; or automatic legrest up

6 = Planmeca Compact i chair with 510 automatic legrest; in automatic state

7 = Planmeca Compact i chair with 460 automatic legrest; in automatic state
8 = Planmeca Compact e with swivelled position recognition and fixed legrest
9 = Planmeca Compact e with swivelled position recognition and automatic legrest
A = Planmeca Compact e swivelled to 90° with automatic legrest
Note: The Planmeca Compact i chair with automatic legrest can be either number 5 or 6/7;
it is number 5 if the legrest is locked up, and number 6/7 when the legrest is moving
synchronously with the backrest.
n.104 Instrument multiplexer extra water valve (EWV) control

This service mode configures the instrument multiplexer extra water valve (EWV) control.
Compact i V1:
0 = disabled (for V1 G-version IMUX only)
(Note! For Compact i V1 G-version MUX sterile water connector is used for extra water or
circulation valve control. If sterile water system is used SM104=0 must be selected.
Compact i V2:
1 = Spray water circulation valve (Boot up/30min circulation, pressure release on
instrument select/drive)
3 = Spray water circulation valve(pressure release on instrument select/drive)
n.105 Enable/disable instrument positions

In this service mode you can enable/disable instrument positions. The different setting
combination can be scrolled and selected by using the minus (-) and plus (+) buttons (or
by using the A and B buttons if you do not have a touch panel). A disabled instrument
position is displayed with a short line. Note that the syringe cannot be disabled.
n.106 Set mode of Planmeca Lumion polymerisation light

In this service mode you can select the working mode of the Planmeca Lumion
polymerisation light.
0 = Independent mode. The instrument’s own control buttons are used to select the
desired curing mode and to start the polymerisation cycle. The length of the
polymerisation cycle can not be changed from the dental unit.
1 = Unit controlled mode. The curing mode is selected from the handpiece, but the
polymerisation cycle can be started either from the handpiece or the dental unit foot
control. The length of the polymerisation cycle can be programmed from the dental unit.
Factory default is 1.
n.107 Triggering level of E45 adjustment

In this service mode you can adjust the triggering level of error E45 if the low external
water pressure is a problem. The default value is 17, which corresponds with the spray
water pressure of 1.7 bar. The adjustment range is 1 - 17 in steps of 1.

n.108 Stopping delay for instrument spray air

This service mode is for setting the air flow delay after the water stop on the instrument.
Every step equals to 65 ms more delay.
0 = no delay
1= 65 ms
2 = 130 ms
3 = 195 ms
4 = 260 ms (default)
.
.
15 = 975 ms
n.109 Unit type setting to enable or disable the IMUX and the door
features
This service mode is used to enable or disable the IMUX and the door safety features, if
needed. The factory default is either 0 or 3, depending on the unit type selection in service
mode n.100.
0 = Compact i (nor)
3 = Compact e (Co.E). Door switch is ignored.
28 = Cart (CArt). No error messages, but the text "CArt" is displayed if the IMUX is
disconnected.
31 = Independent cart (In.CA). The door switch is ignored and no error messages are
displayed, but the text "CArt" is displayed if the IMUX is disconnected.
44 = No instrument console (noI.C). Neither error messages nor the text "CArt" are
displayed if the IMUX is disconnected. Cup filling and bowl rinsing get water, the assistant
syringe gets water and air, the syringe heater can be powered on, and the water heater
can be powered on even if the IMUX is disconnected.
3.12 New main control board
n 110 Outputs
1st vertical segment (counting from right): WMS use
2nd: WMS use
3rd: Factory use
4th: Factory use
5th: Factory use
6th: Factory use
7th: Factory use
8th: Factory use

n 111 Inputs
1st vertical segment (counting from right): WMS use, see service mode n 126
2nd: WMS use, see service mode n 126
3rd: WMS use, see service mode n 125
4th: Bowl above patient chair
5th: Cup recognition
6th: WMS use, see service mode n 125
7th: Chair type input 0
8th: Chair type input 1
n 112 Inputs
For factory use.
n 113 Show side delivery arm emergency switches signals

This service mode is used to check the operation of the up and down safety switches of
the side delivery arm. The display should normally show D0U0 if nothing is touching the
switches (switch closed) and the cable and connectors are OK. Pushing the switches must
change the display to 1 (one) (switch opens). A continuous open circuit in the cables
would also cause the display to show D0U1.
n 114 Show bowl position

This service mode shows the bowl position.
0 = Bowl is not in the rest position, the chair can only be driven slightly upwards.
1 = Bowl is in the rest position.
n 115 Show glass identification signal

This service mode shows the cup identification signal.
0 = The cup sensor does not identify the cup and the cup filling is not activated (no water
flow).
1 = The cup is in the holder and cup filling is activated when pressing the Cup fill button.
n.116 Select cup filling mode

Use this mode to select the cup filling mode. The following settings are possible:
0 = Cup sensor is not used, i.e. the water will flow even if the cup is not in the holder.
1 = Cup filling does not start if the cup is not in the holder.
2 = Cup filling starts automatically when the cup is placed to the holder and stops when the
cup is removed or when the filling time runs out.
n 117 Show active time of drive air pulse width modulation

For factory use.
n 118 Show active time of spray water pulse width modulation

For factory use.

n 119 Show active time of spray air pulse width modulation

For factory use.
n 120 Show active instrument power consumption

This service mode is used to check the power consumption (in Watts) of the active
instrument. Note that the error in the reading is ±15%.
n.121 Select the length of the automatic legrest

This service mode is used to select the length of the automatic legrest. The following
settings are possible:
0 = 510 mm long legrest
n.122 Armrest selection

This service mode is used to select / deselect the armrests. The maximum allowed chair
height when the bowl is above the chair will increase when the armrests are deselected:
0 = The armrests are deselected.
1 = The armrests are selected.
n.123 Factory test

For factory use.
n.124 Set the type of Planmeca Compact i

This service mode is used to select the G Compact i dental unit:
0 = Normal Planmeca Compact i
1 = G Compact i
3.13 Water Management System
n 125 Show Water Management System status

This service mode shows the Water management system (WMS) status.
The first digit shows the container status:

0 = Status unknown
1 = Pressurised, water level stable or lowering
2 = Pressurised, container fills up slowly, water level stable or lowering
3 = No pressure, container fills up quickly
4 = Unknown pressure status, water level stable or lowering
5 = No pressure, siphon

The second digit shows the WMS status:

0 = Status unknown
1 = Domestic water mode
2 = Clean water mode
3 = Cuspidor door open
4 = Cuspidor door just closed
The third digit shows the water level in the container:

0 = Unknown
1 = Below lower limit (empty)
2 = Between lower and upper limit (normal)
3 = Over upper limit (full) If there is only a line in the display, the WMS is not identified.
n 126 Show Water Management System inputs and outputs

This service mode shows the WMS output and input signals.
1st vertical segment (counting from right): Input, Clean water valve
2nd: Input, container and pump ON switch
3rd: Input, Clean water mode switch
4th: Not in use.
5th: Output, Clean water disable valve drive
6th: Output, container valve drive
7th: Output, Pump drive
8th: Output, Pump drive enabled
n.127 Water Management System water flow adjustment

In this service mode the water flow of the Water Management System is adjusted.
Check the water flow and adjust the flow by turning the adjustment knob located on the
magnetic valve/pressure regulator assembly. The water flow can be stopped by pressing
the minus (-) button (or the A button if you do not have a touch panel).
Press the plus (+) button (or the B button if you do not have a touch panel) briefly and let
the water run for one minute. Pour the water into a glass measure.
The water flow must be: Metasys typ1 and Compact, Microvac, no suction: 330 - 400 ml /
min. Dürr and Dürr VSA systems: 400 - 500 ml /min.
n.128 Fake pressure sensor readings

The dental unit operates fully normally and even tells the pressure levels of incoming air/
water, driver air or spray air/water (or what they should be). For trade shows when using
the dental unit without water or air.
0 = Normal
1 = Fake pressure readings
Only for exhibition use.

n.129 Adjustment of the upper limit of pre-programmed chair

positions
In this service mode it is possible to adjust the upper limit of the preprogrammed chair
positions. The adjustment range is 191 - 212. The range of the lift motor potentiometer
signal is 0 - 255. In manual operation the maximum value is 240.
The current value from the lift motor potentiometer can be checked from service mode
n.76.
The factory default depends on the chair type, which is shown in service mode n 103, digit
4.
n.130 Disable WCS

In this service mode the Waterline Cleaning System (WCS) operation can be disabled:
0 = WCS is in use (factory default).
1 = Starting of the WCS is disabled, but safety features are still active.
2 = WCS is totally disabled, that is, also safety features are disabled.
n.131 WCS: adjustment of the syringe cleaning solution filling time

In this service mode the WCS cleaning solution filling time of the syringe can be adjusted.
From software version 2.84 onwards the syringe is filled with the cleaning solution first,
before other instruments.
This filling time is adjustable, because sometimes it might be impossible to know which
kind of water flow the dental unit has on the inside. The water flow variation can be
compensated by adjusting the syringe filling time so that the cleaning solution will flow
through the syringe hose.
The adjustment range is 30 - 180 seconds. The factory default is 40 seconds.
n.132 Disable beeper sounds

In this service mode it is possible to disable the beeper sounds.
0 = Beeper on, instrument sounds off (default)
1 = Beeper disabled
2 = Beeper on, instrument sounds on
n.133 Operating light mode

Use this service mode to select the operating light operation mode.
0 = The operating light is not installed (even buttons do not work).
1 = Delight is installed (no errors from bulb burned out).
2 = Delight is installed with errors from bulb burned out (E 58 is displayed).
3 = SingLED or Solanna is installed (default).
Delight is not supported in Compact i Touch v2.

n.134 Motorised headrest

Use this service mode to select the motorised headrest recognition mode.
0 = Not installed; error E80.2 is displayed if the motorised headrest is installed.
1 = Installed; error E80.1 is displayed if the motorised headrest is not installed.
2 = Automatic recognition of motorised headrest (default).
n.135 WMS operation

Use this service mode to select the Water Management System (WMS) operation mode.
0 = Disabled totally (no operation, no error messages).
1 = Not installed; error E63.1 is displayed if WMS is installed.
2 = Installed; error E63.2 is displayed if WMS is not installed (main water for pump / cup fill
/ high-volume and saliva suction).
3 = Automatic WMS recognition (main water for pump / cup fill / high-volume suction).
4 = Automatic WMS recognition (main water for pump / cup fill / high-volume and saliva
suction).
n.136 Disable motorised headrest automatic positions

In this service mode the automatic positions of the motorised headrest can be disabled.
0 = Automatic positions are enabled (default).
1 = Automatic positions are disabled.
n.137 Bowl rotation safety features OR OP delivery arm safety

switch operation for units without a bowl
In this service mode the bowl rotation safety operation and the OP delivery arm safety
operation (when chair is driven upwards) are defined.
0 = The bowl rotation is not included in the safety circuit / The OP delivery arm safety
switch is installed.
1 = The bowl rotation is included in the safety circuit / The OP delivery arm safety switch is
not installed (default).
n.138 Simulation system type

Use this service mode to select the simulation system type.
Compact i V1: 0 = IDSS - Interactive Digital Simulation System
1 = ASW-1 - Advanced Simulation Workplace Single (main valves are in normal use).
2 = ASW-N - Advanced Simulation Workplace (main valves are not in use).
Compact i V2: 0 = Compact i Clinical Simulation System

1 = Compact i Bench Simulation System (main valves are in normal use)
2 = Compact i Bench Simulation System (main valves are not in use)

3.15 Instrument flushing
n.139 Duration of long instrument hose flushing

Use this service mode to set the duration of the long instrument hose flushing. The
adjustment range is 2 - 9 minutes. The factory default is 2 minutes.
Please follow the local hygiene guidance/regulations.
n.140 Suction valve closing time adjustment

Use this service mode to set the suction valve closing time. The adjustment range is 0 - 3
seconds. The factory default is 0.
n.141 Spray water pressure calibration

Compact i V1: In this service mode the instrument spray water pressure measurement is
calibrated. Note that some water will flow from the instrument during calibration.
It is recommended that the water spray of each instrument be checked after calibration. If
there is a water adjustment knob on the instrument handpiece, make sure that the knob is
open. High calibration values (close to 50) may indicate that the instrument waterline is
closed or that the instrument is stuck.
To perform the calibration procedure, select single water using instrument on the
instrument console. Start calibration by entering to the SET-mode. After the automatic
calibration is completed, the calibration value can be fine-tuned manually, but it is not
recommended to change the value considerably.
Compact i V2: In this service mode Instrument spray water/air and internal air pressure
measurement is calibrated. Note that some water will flow from the instrument during
calibration.
It is recommended that the water spray of each instrument be checked after calibration. If
there is a water adjustment knob on the instrument handpiece, make sure that the knob is
open. High calibration values (close to 50) may indicate that the instrument waterline is
closed or that the instrument is stuck.
To perform the calibration procedure, select one ore more water using Instruments on the
instrument console. Start calibration by entering to the SET-mode. After calibration full
bars show which of the Instruments were calibrated and blinking bars if instrument
problem (stuck instrument waterline etc.) was detected.
When instrument is selected the pressure measurement is shown in this service mode.
For water using instrument the value should be 0-15 when instrument is not running.
n.142 Automatic Instrument Flush setting

In this service mode you can define whether an automatic long instrument flush is
performed every time the dental unit is switched on.
0 = The automatic instrument flush is disabled.
1 = The automatic instrument flush is enabled.
The default is 0.

3.18 Foot control
n.143 Foot control button functionality

Note: This service mode only applies to the old foot control.
Use this mode to select the foot control button operation mode.
Do not set other values than the values listed below:
1 = Operates the suction ejector when the unit is idle (the suction ejector is on as long as
the button is pressed)
2 = Changes the motorised headrest mode when the unit is idle (default)
4 = Intraoral camera freeze/save
8 = Reverses the micromotor rotation
9 = Controls the suction ejector when the unit is idle + reverses the micromotor rotation
10 = Changes the motorised headrest mode when the unit is idle + reverses the
micromotor rotation
Note: Other values than those mentioned above are not allowed.
n.144 Foot control left-side knob up functionality

Note: This service mode only applies to the new foot control.
In this mode you can define which function is triggered by pushing the foot control left-side
knob upward.
0 = No function is triggered
1 = The suction ejector is activated
2 = The headrest mode is activated/deactivated
3 = The assistant call / door open functionality is activated
4 = The intraoral camera is activated/deactivated
5 = The operating light is turned on/off
6 = The intraoral scanner is activated/deactivated
7 = Suction is stopped/restarted
8 = The operating light composite mode is turned on/off
The default is 5.
If the dental unit is equipped with a motorised headrest, the default is 2.
n.146 Foot control right-side knob up functionality

In this mode you can define which function is triggered by pushing the foot control right-
side knob upward.
1 = The suction ejector is activated
2 = The headrest mode is activated/deactivated
3 = The assistant call / door open functionality is activated
4 = The intraoral camera is activated/deactivated
5 = The operating light is turned on/off

6 = The intraoral scanner is activated/deactivated

7 = Suction is stopped/restarted
8 = The operating light composite mode is turned on/off
The default is 4.
If the dental unit is equipped with a motorised headrest, the default is 2.
n.148 Touch panel error message details

In this service mode you can define whether the error message details are visible or not.
0 = Error message details are not visible.
1 = Error message details are visible.
The default is 1.
n.149 Foot control left-side knob down functionality

In this mode you can define which instrument function is triggered by pushing the foot
control left-side knob downward.
You must activate an instrument for a value to be shown in this service mode. If no
instrument is activated, no value is shown. The value can be programmed for instrument
hoses 1 - 4 (not for the syringe).
0 = No function
1 = Toggle the instrument spray
2 = Automatic chip blow on/off
3 = Fibre optic light on/off
4 = Power limit on/off
5 = Change the scaler’s operation/working mode
6 = Quickstart on/off for the turbine
7 = Reverse rotation on/off
8 = Torque limit on/off for the Bien-Air MX micromotor
9 = Toggle the drive mode (normal > auto reverse > auto forward) for the Bien-Air MX
micromotor
10 = Start the short cleaning cycle for the polisher
11 = Start the long cleaning cycle for the polisher
12 = turbine spray water pulsing
The default is -.
Once you have changed the value for this service mode, you must return the instrument to
the instrument console and reactivate it for the new settings to take effect.

3.19 Suction Tube Cleaning System
n.150 STCS feed time calibration

In this service mode the Suction Tube Cleaning System water feed time is calibrated. The
maximum filling time is 255 s. If 255 s. is reached, the water flow to the suction tubes is too
small. The water flow should be adjusted using the water knob. The calibration should be
repeated after the water flow adjustment.
After this automatic calibration the fill time can be fine tuned manually by pressing the
minus (-) and plus (+) buttons on the display (or the A and B buttons if you do not have a
touch panel).
After calibration, run the STCS cleaning sequence to make sure that the calibration was
successful. During the filling cycle make sure that the water level fills all the suction tubes
and the water does not flow over.
Note: The system cannot be calibrated when the STCS cleaning cycle is running.
n.151 STCS testing

For factory use.
n.152 STCS Orotol feed bleeding and Orotol calibration

Orotol Bleeding (only centralised system)
Enter the Set -mode by pressing the SET button (or the S-button if you do not have a
touch panel). Select Cont -mode (Continuous Orotol Feed) by using the minus (-) and plus
(+) buttons (A and B buttons if you do not have a touch panel). Press the green start
button on the STCS box. The feed continues until the yellow cancel button is pressed.
Orotol Feed Calibration (only centralised system)
Select Calibration Mode by using the minus (-) and plus (+) buttons (A and B buttons if you
do not have a touch panel). (The Calibration display is the display mode where there are
numbers on the screen). Insert the calibration cup below the STCS Orotol feeding
mouthpiece. Press the green STCS start button. Orotol feeding starts.
The number of suction tubes is shown on the display (X -- Y).
X = Fed tubes
Y = All tubes
The feed is started by pressing the start button. When feed is going on, adjust the Orotol
knob. (If there are two suction tubes, use a full calibration cup. If there is only one suction
tube, about half of the calibration cup is enough.) The feed stops after the feed time has
elapsed.
Press the STCS cancel button to cancel the feed.
3.20 Instrument MUX
n.153 Instrument deselection time

In this mode you can define how quickly the instrument is deselected after the user has
returned it to the instrument console. The adjustment range is 0.4 - 4 seconds and the
default is 0.4 seconds.

3.21 Instrument
n.154 PM Minetto power/RPM range

In this mode you can enable/disable the low speed range for the Planmeca Minetto
micromotor.
0 = Low speed range is disabled. The RPM range for the PM Minetto micromotor is 4000 -
40 000 / P10 - P100. This is the default value.
1 = Low speed range is enabled. The RPM range for the PM Minetto micromotor is 2000 -
40 000 / P5 - P100.
3.22 Suction
n.155 Set suction toggle off delay

Set suction toggle off delay
Suction will continue for given delay when suction is toggled off.
n.156 Set post suction delay

Set post suction delay.
Suction is re-activated for toggled hose(s) for given delay when hose is returned to holder.
3.23 Instrument
n.158 Instrument selection in four-handed dentistry

Instrument prepared by assistant is selected automatically when dentist returns the
currently used instrument.
3.24 Foot control
n.159 Wireless foot control sleep mode start time

This service mode applies only to the wireless foot control.
This mode defines the time the wireless foot control needs to be idle before going to the
sleep mode.
Sleep mode start time can be adjusted from 1 to 8 hours in one hour steps.
Changes will take effect after next reboot.
The default is 2 hours.

3.25 Flexy
n.160 Programmable Flexy button functionality

In this mode you can define which function is triggered by pressing the programmable
Flexy button.
1 = Headrest mode selection
2 = The intraoral camera is activated / deactivated
3 = Rinsing position
4 = Touch-lock is activated / deactivated
5 = Suction is stopped / restarted
6 = Operation light composite mode on/off
The default is 3.
n.161 Automatic chair drive mode

In this service mode you can select the automatic chair drive mode.
3.27 Instrument flushing
n.162 Duration of short instrument hose flushing

Use this service mode to set the duration of the short instrument hose flushing. The
adjustment range is 10 - 30 seconds. The factory default is 30s.
Recommended setting is 30s. Please follow the local hygiene guidance/regulations.
n.163 Factory test

Automatic chair test. Select 50Hz mode or 60Hz mode by pressing +/-. Activate test by
pressing SET.
Test drives chair lift down and up and backrest up and down continuosly in 12 (10 seconds
in 60Hz mode) second intervals.
There is a 401 (405 seconds in 60Hz mode) seconds pause after driving lift and backreset
up and down.
Test sequence can be stopped by pressing SET, arrow or +/- buttons.

n.164 WCS final flushing time

Waterline Cleaning System final flushing time adjustment.
4 - 15min (dental units with bowl, default 4min)
8 - 15min (dental units without bowl, default 10min)
This service mode does not apply to dental units equipped with WMS.
3.30 Other
n.165 External relay activation

In this service mode you can select the instrument slot that can be used to activate
external relay (P33). Selected slot is shown with a long line. Syringe can't be selected.
Note. Instrument in the slot needs to be a rotating instrument to enable external relay
activation.
n.166 Suction tube cleaning emptying pulse

In this service mode you can enable/disable suction tube cleaning emptying pulse.
0 = disabled
1 = enabled (default)
n.197 Spray water proportional valve test

Select instrument and press start button to start test. After test highest pressure variation
during test is displayed.
Acceptable value 0..500(mBar) after test.
n.198 Spray air proportional valve test

n.199 Drive air proportional valve test

n 200 Boot information bits

For factory use.

n 201 Boot software checksum

For factory use.
n 202 Main software checksum

For factory use.
n.203 Processor watchdog test. Restarts the dental unit with error
E 75.1.
Restarts the dental unit with error E 75.1.
n.204 Processor reset test. Restarts the dental unit without errors.
Restarts the dental unit without errors.
3.32 Chair
n.205 Lifter height calibration in millimetres (mm)

Measure the distance from the floor to the centre of the backrest joint and set that value in
this service mode.
n.206 Backrest angle calibration in degrees (deg)

Measure the backrest angle (or drive to 0 with spirit level) and set that angle here.
3.33 Headrest
n 207 Headrest length in millimetres (mm) in relation to calibration

point and virtual origo point
This service mode shows the headrest length in millimetres (mm) in relation to the
calibration point and the virtual origo point.
n 208 Headrest height in millimetres (mm) in relation to backrest

zero-level and virtual origo point
This service mode shows the headrest height in millimetres (mm) in relation to the
backrest zero-level and the virtual origo point.
n 209 Headrest angle in degrees (deg) in relation to backrest angle

and virtual origo point
This service mode shows the headrest angle in degrees (deg) in relation to the backrest
angle and the virtual origo point.

3.34 Romexis connection
n.210 Enable Romexis connection

0 = Romexis connection (Romexis Clinic Management) disabled and unit dentist selection
enabled (Compact i V1: Classic Intracam communication (Dimaxis) and/or Planmeca
Chair control communication).
1 = Romexis connection (Romexis Clinic Management) enabled with Romexis user
settings and USB camera control.
2 = Romexis connection (Romexis Clinic Management) enabled with unit dentist selection
and USB camera control). Romexis user settings unavailable.
and USB camera control). Romexis user settings available. This option is for Compact i V2
only.
and USB camera control). RFID user settings available. This option is for Compact i V2
only.
5 = Romexis connection (Romexis Clinic Management) enabled with USB camera
control). PlanID user settings available. This option is for Compact i V2 only.
The default is 0.
n.211 Romexis connection remote operation locked features

The value is a sum of the numbers below:
1 = Lock going to service modes
2 = Lock programming
4 = Lock whole keyboard usage
8 = Lock all chair drives (default)
16 = Romexis connection is in read-only mode
If the value is 0, it means that there are no restrictions to usage.
If the value is < 8, a notification on the touch panel indicates that the remote chair
operation is enabled.
n.212 Dental unit locally locked features when unit is started up

The value is a sum of the numbers below:
1 = Lock going to service modes
2 = Lock programming
4 = Lock whole keyboard usage
8 = Lock all chair drives
16 = Lock suction tubes
32 = Instrument selection
64 = Lock instrument driving/operation/usage
128 = Lock nurse panel chair drive
The default is 0.
Note: Be very careful when setting locally locked settings. The settings will take effect after
the unit is restarted.

n.213 Set RFID users automatic logout time

This service mode is used to adjust the time when RFID user is automatically logged out if
user has been idle.
The adjustment range is from 15 minutes to 8 hours (0.25, 0.50, 1.00, 2.00, 4.00, 8.00).
Automatic logout can be disabled by setting the value to OFF.
The factory default is OFF.
3.35 Network
n.220 Set IP address

In this service mode you can change the unit’s IP address.
Make sure that the IP address is in the same subnetwork as your Romexis server. Select
the number you want to change by using the plus (+) and minus (-) buttons (or the A and B
buttons if you do not have a touch panel). Enter the Set mode by pressing the SET button
(or the S-button if you do not have a touch panel).
The selected number is shown on the display and indicated with a letter A, b, C or d.
A = 10
b=0
C=0
d=1
Value format: A.b.C.d
Default: 10.0.0.1 (A.b.C.d)
n.221 Set subnet mask

In this service mode you can change the subnet mask.
Select the number you want to change by using the plus (+) and minus (-) buttons (or the
A and B buttons if you do not have a touch panel). Enter the Set mode by pressing the
SET button (or the S-button if you do not have a touch panel).
A = 255
b = 255
C = 255
d=0
Default: 255.255.255.0 (A.b.C.d)

n.222 Set default gateway address

In this service mode you can change the default gateway address.
A=0
b=0
C=0
d=0
n.223 Enable/Disable DHCP

In this service mode you can enable or disable the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP). We recommend you use a static IP address, because with DHCP, the IP address
may change every time you boot the machine.
0 = Disabled (default)
1 = Enabled
n.224 Set Romexis address

In this service mode you can change the Romexis server address.
A=0
b=0
C=0
d=0
3.36 Other service modes
n.250 Change wireless foot control transmitter channel

In this service mode you can change the current wireless foot control transmitter channel.
The display shows the current connection status and the current transmitter channel (X
Y). X is the connection status (0..1). 1 means connected and 0 means not connected. Y is
the current channel (0..15).
Press SET to change the channel. You can change the channel by pressing +/-.
Connection status changes to 0 if connection is lost and back to 1 if connection is found.

3.37 Headrest
n 300 Headrest communication status

1. (leftmost) digit: Always 1
2. digit: Output message
3. digit: Drive state
4. (rightmost) digit: Input mode
Output messages:
0: Power is off
1: Power is on, slowing down (no control)
2: Power is on, responding to buttons
3: Power is on, automatic drive
Drive states:
0: Headrest not installed
1: Headrest stopped (safety)
2: Headrest ready
3: Headrest slowing down
4: Headrest running, manual operation
5: Headrest running, automatic operation
Input modes:
0: Headrest input unknown
1: Headrest not installed or open circuit
2: Headrest short circuit
3: Headrest input wrong CRC
4: Headrest input unknown mode
5: Headrest input normal mode but unknown type
6: Headrest input in burn mode but unknown type
7: Headrest input in burn mode
8: Headrest input normal
1028 is a typical idle value.

1248 is a typical manual drive value.
n.301 Headrest software major version

This service mode shows the headrest software major version which is in use on the
headrest PCB. When in SET mode, it shows the headrest software major version on the
MCB software chip that can be upgraded to the headrest PBC.
n.302 Headrest software minor version

This service mode shows the headrest software minor version which is in use on the
headrest PCB. When in SET mode, it shows the headrest software minor version on the
MCB software chip that can be upgraded to the headrest PBC.

n.303 Upgrade headrest software

Press the SET button (or the S-button if you do not have a touch panel) to upgrade
headrest software on the headrest PCB into version that is on the MCB software chip.
Does not apply to Compact i Touch v2. See n.500 for v2 upgrade.
n.304 Headrest manual angle rotation speed

In this service mode the headrest manual angle rotation speed is adjusted.
Value range: 4 - 15
Default value: 6
Larger value is faster.
n.305 Headrest manual height movement speed

In this service mode the headrest manual height movement speed is adjusted.
Value range: 4 - 15
Default value: 6
n.306 Headrest manual length movement speed

In this service mode the headrest manual length movement speed is adjusted.
Value range: 10 - 15
Default value: 10
n.307 Headrest automatic movement speed

In this service mode the headrest automatic movement speed is adjusted.
Value range: 4 - 15
Default value: 6
n.308 Headrest length current limit value

In this service mode the headrest length current limit value is adjusted.
Value range: 0 - 15
Default value: 10
Larger value indicates that more current (force) is needed to stop.
n.309 Headrest joint 2 closing gap stopping term value

No function
n.310 Headrest joint 2 (near cushion) ADC-value / upholstery

The value is typically between 120 and 933. After pressing the SET button (or the S-button
if you do not have a touch panel), the joint can be driven. This service mode is used when
the headrest upholstery is replaced.

n.311 Headrest joint 1 (near backrest) ADC-value

The value is typically between 64 and 933. After pressing the SET button (or the S-button
if you do not have a touch panel), the joint can be driven.
n.312 Headrest length ADC-value

The value is typically from 178 to 954. After pressing the SET button (or the S-button if you
do not have a touch panel), the length can be driven.
n.313 Headrest joint 2 (near cushion) drive WITHOUT limits and

In this service mode the headrest joint 2 (near cushion) is driven WITHOUT limits and
potentiometer in the SET-mode.
The text “H2- ” is shown on the display in the SET-mode.
n.314 Headrest joint 1 (near backrest) drive WITHOUT limits and

In this service mode the headrest joint 1 (near backrest) is driven WITHOUT limits and
potentiometer in the SET-mode.
The text “H1- ” is shown on the display in the SET-mode.
n.315 Headrest length calibration

Like service modes n.79 and n.80. Text “HL--“ is displayed on the touch panel. When the
potentiometer value is too far, the rightmost block is up. When the potentiometer value is
too near, the rightmost block is down. When the potentiometer is calibrated, the rightmost
block is in the middle. First, drive the headrest length joint on the outer limit, then tune the
potentiometer according to the rightmost blocks.
After pressing the SET-button (or the S-button if you do not have a touch panel), the length
can be driven WITHOUT limits and potentiometer.
n 316 Headrest joystick directions and buttons

1. block (leftmost) spare I/O
2. block left joystick button
3. block right joystick button
4. block toggle from any button
5. block joystick out 6. block joystick in
7. block joystick down
8. block (rightmost) joystick up
n 317 Potentiometer select line test

If the value is 0 (or ±1) and does not change when the joystick(s) are moved, the select
wire is broken.
n.318 As service mode n.18 but only headrest endurance test

For factory use.

n.319 As service mode n.18 but chair and headrest endurance tests
For factory use.
n 320 Headrest right joystick horizontal ADC-value

In this service mode the headrest right joystick horizontal ADC-value is shown. The value
is typically ±10 when the joystick is centred and from ±40 to ±100 when it is in use. The
positive direction is away from the backrest.
n 321 Headrest right joystick vertical ADC-value

In this service mode the headrest right joystick vertical ADC-value is shown. The value is
typically ±10 when the joystick is centred and from ±40 to ±100 when it is in use. The
positive direction is up.
n 322 Headrest left (cabinet side) joystick horizontal ADC-value

In this service mode the headrest left (cabinet side) joystick horizontal ADC-value is
shown. The value is typically ±10 when the joystick is centred and from ±40 to ±100 when
it is in use. The positive direction is away from the backrest.
n 323 Headrest left (cabinet side) joystick vertical ADC-value

In this service mode the headrest left (cabinet side) joystick vertical ADC-value is shown.
The value is typically ±10 when the joystick is centred and from ±40 to ±100 when it is in
use. The positive direction is up.
3.38 Instrument
n.324 Instrument durability test

For factory use.
3.39 Maintenance
n.400 Set yearly maintenance reminder period.

Set the number of days before the unit starts to remind the user about yearly maintenance.
n.401 Set yearly maintenance period

Set the yearly maintenance period in days.
n.402 How many days left until next yearly maintenance or confirm
yearly maintenance
View how many days is left until next yearly maintenance. Confirm yearly maintenance by
pressing SET button.

3.40 Compact i v2 specific
n.500 Software upgrade

Upgrades the unit software from a USB stick attached to the main board.
3.41 Regional
n.600 Change RFID area of operation

In this service mode you can change the area of operation for the PlanID reader. Note. Do
not use PlanID reader outside supported regions.
OFF = NFC and UHF radio disabled (default)
EU = European union
US = North America
CA = Canada
Cn = China
In = India
Kr = Korea
AU = Australia
nZ = New Zealand
n.999 Main program loop speed

For factory use.
Displays the speed with filtering in the SET-mode.

Chapter E: HELP & ERROR
MESSAGES
1 HELP MESSAGES
1.1 General about help messages

The help messages are intended to assist the user in special situations. A help message
usually indicates a user error rather than a system error or malfunction. The help
messages mainly cover the following areas:
• violations against built in security functions
• warnings about amalgam collectors that needs to be emptied
• controls or keys with no response in certain situations
• erroneously attached instruments
• notifying the user of abnormal conditions that cannot be categorised as errors.
The help messages appear on the display as capital letters “HE” followed by a number.
The message stays on the display only as long as the reason for it continues. The unit is
otherwise fully functional, except for the reported problem. Only one help message is
shown at a time.
After the unit has been updated with the latest version of the MCB software it may report a
help message that is not listed in this manual. In this case, please request a new revision
of the manual. The following table is a list of currently available help messages and their
reasons.
1.2 Help message short-form table
Table 43: Help messages
HELP CODE MEANING ACTION OR EXPLANATION

H1 Amalgam collector is 95% full. Replace or empty the collector as soon as
possible, or at least before the next patient.
Pressing the program button allows to
continue the operation until the collector is
100% (totally) full.
H2 Amalgam collector is 100% full. Replace or empty the collector immediately.
The suction system cannot be used before the
collector is emptied or replaced.
H3 Patient chair cannot be driven down Check that the space under the seat is free
because safety switch is activated. and nothing is touching the plate at the bottom.
The chair can be driven normally after the
possible obstruction has been removed.

1 HELP MESSAGES Chapter E: HELP & ERROR MESSAGES

H4 This left-hand instrument position allows The leftmost position in the console is reserved
only syringe. for the syringe only. Replace this instrument
with a syringe. Place the other instrument to
one of the four right-hand places.
H5 This instrument position does not accept Remove the syringe from this position and
syringe. replace it with any other kind of instrument.
The syringe must be placed in the leftmost
place.
H6 Patient chair cannot be driven when Stop the instrument (release the foot control
instrument is in use. pedal) to be able to run the chair.
H7 Patient chair up/down movement is not Close the cuspidor door to be able to run the
allowed when cuspidor door is open. chair up/down or to a pre-programmed
position.
H8 Chair height can not be programmed this Run the chair slightly down to be able to
high in automatic positions for patient safety program this position into memory.
reasons.
H9 This scaler cannot currently be used with This scaler needs a dedicated electronics that
this unit. is not installed, or the scaler electronics
installed is not compatible with this scaler.
H 10 Wait while configuring the dental instrument Wait a few seconds for the unit to check your
setup. instrument configuration, since it has changed.
H 11 Software download mode is on.
H 12 Unit's internal error reporting is disabled. The unit operates normally but no errors are
reported (exhibition use). Use service mode
n.15 to turn error reporting back on. See
service mode n.15 in chapter "Service mode"
for details.
H 13 Instrument cannot run because of patient Return the foot control pedal once to the
security violation. middle position to start the instrument.
Instruments do not start if the standard foot
control pedal is already pushed to the right or
left when the instrument is picked up from the
instrument console.
H 14 This dental instrument is not recognised To be able to operate this new instrument the
(new type of instrument). MCB software must be updated. See section
"Upgrading software" in chapter "Parts
replacement & repair" for details.
H 15 This button has no function at the moment. Instruments: Pick up a dental instrument
before attempting to alter its settings; or if the
instrument is selected, this function is not
allowed with this instrument. Other buttons: the
unit does not have this function.

Chapter E: HELP & ERROR MESSAGES 1 HELP MESSAGES

H 16 Operating light is dimmed and This feature enables easier work with
polymerisation light can be used. composite materials, minimising the risk of
operating light induced curing. This feature is
triggered by picking up and returning the
polymerisation light to its holder without
starting it. The operating light returns to normal
at the same instance any control is touched or
another instrument selected. The feature can
be disabled, see service mode n.73 in chapter
"Service mode" for details.
H 17 No syringe connected to instrument The console syringe must be re-connected,
console. otherwise there is an air-leak from the syringe
QC whenever an instrument or device that
requires air pressure is used.
H 18 No instrument hose connected to this The instrument is picked up, but there is no
instrument place. hose connected at this location. Check that all
hoses go to the right instrument arms.
H 19 No syringe connected to connector located The assistant's syringe must be re-connected,
on cuspidor. otherwise there is an air-leak from the
assistant's syringe QC whenever an
instrument or device that requires air pressure
is used. Install the syringe or disable the
syringe using service mode n.84. For details
on the service mode, see chapter "Service
mode".
H 20 Wrong instrument is connected to cuspidor Check instrument hose on cuspidor and
syringe connector or assistant instrument configuration (service mode n.83).
configuration is wrong.
H 21 Flow of both spray air and spray water are Enter the spray programming mode to set a
programmed to zero (no flow). flow other than zero, see section "Instrument
spray flow rates" in chapter "Touch panel
functions" for details.
H 22 Main air or water valve is set to be always This is a reminder that either of the main
closed in SM 12 (air) /13 (water). valves has been set to be always closed. The
setting may be changed in service modes SM
12 (air) and SM 13 (water).
H 23 Automatic/manual chip blow cannot be used
when sterile water function is selected.
H 24 Programming of selected setting is disabled. The programming of the selected setting is
disabled. Disable the protection using service
mode n.0. For more information, see chapter
"Service mode".
H 25 Planmeca Compact e help message: Swivel the patient chair with automatic legrest
Patient chair cannot be driven into automatic before driving the chair to the automatic
chair position. position. Check that the chair type in service
mode n.103 is correct. (See service mode n
103 in chapter "Service mode".)


H 26 Drive chair upwards, then lower backrest. If Drive the chair upwards before lowering the
patient chair is attached to unit, chair's backrest. If this help message is shown while
automatic positions are not switched on. the patient chair is attached to the unit, it
means that you have forgotten to switch on the
chair’s automatic positions. To clear the
message, put the operation mode switch on
the cuspidor side of the chair base in the
“AUTO” position (switch up).
H 27 Drive backrest upwards, then lower chair. If Drive the backrest upwards before lowering
patient chair is attached to unit, chair's the chair. If this help message is shown while
H 28 Planmeca Compact WE's help message. Connect the lifter cable.
H 29 Drive chair downwards, then lower backrest. Drive the chair downwards before lowering the
If patient chair is attached to unit, chair's backrest. If this help message is shown while
H 30 Close water tap. Fill container with
disinfectant up to groove and attach to unit.
H 31 Switch unit off, leave disinfectant in unit When unit is turned back on, disinfection
overnight (min. 8 h). procedure continues.
H31.1 Remove container, fill it up to groove with
water and attach to unit.
H31.2 Attach container filled with water.
H 32 Container flushing completed. Remove container from unit.
H 33 Open water tap.
H 34 No instruments selected when starting Select at least one instrument and syringe
instrument flushing or waterline cleaning. (remove from holder, bend the instrument
arms) .
H 35 Instruments are locked for safety reasons. Select instruments, place them in flushing
holder, and press Instrument flushing button to
start instrument flushing.
H35.1 Waterline cleaning cancelled or failed. Make sure water tap is open. Select
Remove container. instruments, place them in flushing holder and
press Instrument flushing button to start
instrument flushing.
H 36 Flushing ready. Return instruments to Also bend and release syringe's instrument
instrument console. arm once.


H36.1 Instrument flushing completed, but water Run instruments for a while with spray water to
flow was not detected for one or more ensure instrument flushing is sufficient.
instruments.
H36.8 Low water pressure during final flushing. Perform long instrument flushing to ensure
instruments are flushed.
H 37 Waterline Cleaning System cycle has been
interrupted.
H 38 Low water pressure during final rinsing. When waterline cleaning is finished, perform
long instrument flushing to ensure instruments
are flushed.
H 39 Syringe misplaced or its flow not detected in Return syringe to console. Then, select
waterline cleaning. syringe (bend instrument arm) again and place
it carefully in flushing holder.
H 40 Too many Bien-Air MX Brushless A maximum of two is allowed.
Micromotors.
H 41 Insert suction tubes to STCS holder, add
disinfectant and press green start button
(upper button).
H 42 STCS program completed. Return suction
tubes to unit suction arm and close STCS
box cover.
H 43 STCS program cancelled.
H 44 Incorrect suction tube amount detected.
Return them to unit suction arm, place them
back to STCS holders and start cleaning.
H 45 Set WMS to Domestic Water Supply -mode STCS can not be used when WMS is set to
and wait until WMS bottle is full. Then start Bottled Water -mode.
STCS cleaning.
H 46 Suction use is forbidden or there are no The value of service mode n.83 is 0.
suction tubes in dental unit configuration.
H 47 STCS Orotol pressure is low. (In
automatised STCS: Fill Orotol container).
H 48 WMS must be set to Bottled water off and Bottled water off = domestic water is used
Bottle on -modes before starting STCS Bottle on = bottle is used; domestic water is
cleaning sequence. run through the bottle.
H 50 No cup in cup holder. Sensor does not Place a cup on the cup holder. Or change the
recognise cup when pressing cup fill button. setting of service mode n 115.
H 51 Bowl is above patient chair when driving If the unit has a bowl, move the bowl to the rest
chair up. position. If the unit has an OP delivery arm
safety switch, check that the OP delivery arm
is not blocking the chair movement.
H 52 Patient chair can not be driven upward
because safety switch of side delivery arm is
released.
H 53 Patient chair can not be driven downward
because safety switch of side delivery arm is
released.


H 54 Cup is inserted in cup holder. Remove the cup and make sure the cup fill
tube is above the bowl.
H 55 Disinfectant container attached. To start
waterline cleaning, select instruments and
press Waterline cleaning button.
H 60 WMS: Container almost empty in Domestic Reduce water use for a moment.
water supply -mode.
H 61 WMS: Container almost empty in Bottled Reduce water use and fill the container as
water -mode. soon as possible.
H 62 WMS: Container switch is turned off. Switch on the container switch.
H 63 Cuspidor door is open. Close the door.
H 64 Fill container with disinfectant over upper
sensor.
H 65 Fill container with water over upper sensor.
H 66 Wait 8 hours or switch unit off for the night.
H 67 Instrument flush cancelled. Return
instruments to instrument console.
H 68 Romexis connection lost. Make sure the Ethernet cable is attached and
Romexis is running.
H 69 Unable to create a new user. Maximum
amount of local users exceeded.
H 70 Brushless micromotor is stuck or broken.
H 71 Romexis user ID already in use. Check the ID, select another one, or allow
rebind in Romexis.
H 72 Incompatible Romexis version. PlanID is not supported with this version of
Romexis.
H 73 Failed to copy user profile from Romexis. Failed to copy user profile from Romexis.
H 74 PlanID reader missing. PlanID reader is either missing or not
functional.
H 75 Yearly maintenance in <#> days. Contact service for yearly maintenance.
H 76 Yearly maintenance performed.
H 80 Headrest length safety feature activated Check that nothing is blocking the headrest
when driving headrest. Check that nothing is movement. The headrest can be driven
blocking headrest movements. normally after the possible obstruction has
been removed.
H80.1 Headrest length drive limit activated when Check that nothing is blocking headrest
driving headrest. movements.
Faulty length motor, motor cable, non-
lubricated slider rail or position potentiometer
may cause this problem.


H 81 Headrest angle B safety feature activated Check that nothing is blocking the headrest
when driving headrest. Check that nothing is movement. The headrest can be driven
blocking headrest movements. normally after the possible obstruction has
been removed.
Faulty angle B motor, motor cable or position
sensor may cause this problem.
H81.1 Headrest angle A drive limit activated when Check that nothing is blocking the headrest
driving headrest. movement.
Faulty angle A motor, motor cable or position
sensor may cause this problem.
H 82 Connecting to wireless foot control was Connection was established with the
successful. requested foot control.
H 83 Foot control handle pressed down. Release the foot control handle.
H 84 Connecting to wireless foot control failed. Connection with the requested foot control
could not be established. Make sure the foot
control is active (connect to a charger, if
possible), is in the vicinity of the unit, and try
again.
H 85 SW update denied. Chair was moving or The chair was moving or an instrument was in
instrument was in use while starting SW use while starting the software update.
update.
H 86 SW update denied. Incorrect control panel An incorrect control panel type was detected
type was detected while starting SW update. while starting the software update.
H 87 Software update halted. Activate the Wireless foot control has to be activated before
wireless foot control by pressing the handle. it can be updated.
H 88 Wireless foot control configuration was Wireless foot control channel and power
successful. settings were successfully changed.
H 89 Wireless foot control configuration failed. Wireless foot control channel and power
settings could not be changed. Make sure the
foot control is active (connect to a charger, if
possible), is in the vicinity of the unit, and try
again.
H 90 This button has no function at the moment,
press Pos Sel, Chair/Headr/Light Sel first.
H 91 Stop (Help) button pressed.
H 92 Help (Stop) button pressed.
H 93 This button has no function at the moment
because there is no motorised light.
H 94 Clock calibration failed. Maximum
calibration range exceeded.
H 95 Patient chair automatic position cannot be
reached because legrest is unlocked or
armrests are blocking movement.
H 96 PlanID tag already in use. PlanID tag assigned to another user.
H 97 Failed to assign PlanID tag to user. Check Romexis connection.


H 98 User not found. User not found with this PlanID tag. Create a
new user or select an existing Romexis user
and assign the PlanID tag.
H98.1 User login failed. Retry login or reboot the unit. If problem
persists, contact service.
H 99 Unit has been switched off without This help message can be disabled, see
performing long flushing after water has service mode n.99 for details.
been used. Perform long flushing.
HE200 Detected new software update. Confirm to
install?
HE201 Detected new software update SD-card.
Confirm to install 5.3.0.9.R ?
HE210 Software update. Installing to Control panel Do not turn the power off while the software is
bootloader sw. DO NOT TURN POWER being updated.
OFF.
application sw. DO NOT TURN POWER being updated.
OFF.
application sw. DO NOT TURN POWER being updated.
OFF.
HE216 Software update. Downloading from server. Do not turn the power off while downloading
DO NOT TURN POWER OFF. software from the server.
HE218 Software update. Installing to Main PCB. DO Do not turn the power off while the software is
NOT TURN POWER OFF. being updated.
END Flushing completed. Remove syringe from
flushing holder and return it to console. If
syringe is removed, return it to flushing
holder.
DOOR Cuspidor door is open. Close the door.
FC.LD Move foot control pedal to leftmost position. Move the foot control pedal to the leftmost
Press pedal down and hold. While holding, position. Press the pedal down and hold. While
push centre knob briefly in 'chair up' holding, push the centre knob briefly in the
direction. ‘chair up’ direction.
FC.LU Move foot control pedal to leftmost position Move the foot control pedal to the leftmost
and hold. While holding, push centre knob position and hold. While holding, push the
briefly in 'chair up' direction. centre knob briefly in the ‘chair up’ direction.
FC.CD Press foot control pedal down and hold. Press the foot control pedal down and hold.
While holding, push centre knob briefly in While holding, push the centre knob briefly in
'chair up' direction. the ‘chair up’ direction.
FC.CU Keep foot control pedal in rest position Keep the foot control pedal in the rest position
(centre). Push centre knob briefly in 'chair (centre). Push the centre knob briefly in the
up' direction. ‘chair up’ direction.
FC.RD Move foot control pedal to rightmost Move the foot control pedal to the rightmost
position. Press pedal down and hold. While position. Press the pedal down and hold. While
holding, push centre knob briefly in 'chair up' holding, push the centre knob briefly in the
direction. ‘chair up’ direction.


FC.RU Move foot control pedal to rightmost position Move the foot control pedal to the rightmost
and hold. While holding, push centre knob position and hold. While holding, push the
briefly in 'chair up' direction. centre knob briefly in the ‘chair up’ direction.
FC.-- To exit foot control calibration mode, press
and hold down calibration switch for 4
seconds.
H 7003 Control panel is temporarily disabled due to Make sure the touch screen is clean and dry.
interference on touch screen. If the problem continues, contact service.

2 ERROR MESSAGES Chapter E: HELP & ERROR MESSAGES
2 ERROR MESSAGES
2.1 General about error messages

The error messages are intended to assist the technician in situations where the control
system detects a condition that could be a possible fault. An error message usually
indicates a system error or malfunction rather than a user error. The error messages cover
the following areas:
• insufficient pressures to control the instruments or other pneumatic problems
• failed (open or short circuited) cables and/or valves
• printed circuit boards not functioning properly
• failed bulbs and/or fuses
• power supply failures or problems
• incompatible printed circuit boards or software versions
• sensor and switch failures
• other miscellaneous errors.
The error messages appear on the display as a capital letter “E” followed by a number
(“n.n”). The number (left side of decimal point or if no decimal at all) indicates the type of
error. Some error messages also have a decimal part (number on the right side of decimal
point). This decimal part determines in more detail the reason for the error.
The error message stays on the display only as long as the error exists. In the case of
several simultaneous errors, the display shows them one at a time, in ascending number
order. The unit is otherwise fully functional, except for the reported error(s). Error
messages are not stored internally for later retrieval.
After the unit has been updated with the latest version of the MCB software it may report
an error message that is not listed in this manual. In this case, please request a new
revision of the manual. The table on the following pages is a list of currently available error
messages and their meanings. For a detailed description of the error messages please
refer to the indicated pages.

Chapter E: HELP & ERROR MESSAGES 2 ERROR MESSAGES
2.2 Disabling/enabling error messages

The error reporting system can be disabled (service mode 15). This is useful in exhibitions
or showrooms when a complete installation cannot be made (missing vacuum, water or air
supply). In these cases the errors should be disabled so that the unit does not
unnecessarily show error messages on the display.
The unit briefly flashes an “HE 12” message on the display at power-on, to remind that the
error message system is disabled. Please refer to service mode "n.15 Disable error
messages" on page 105 for details how to enable/disable the error message system.
2.3 Error message short-form table
Table 44: General error messages
ERROR EXPLANATION
CODE
E1.01 Main water valve short circuit.
E1.02 Main air valve short circuit.
E1.03 Bowl rinse valve short circuit.
E1.04 Cup filling valve short circuit.
E1.05 Water flush valve short circuit.
E1.06 Separator pulse valve short circuit.
E1.07 Ejector valve short circuit.
E1.08 Extra out 1 short circuit.
E1.11 Separator start signal / Microvac's start valve short circuit.
E1.12 Assistant syringe water valve short circuit.
E1.13 Separator alarm reset signal short circuit.
E1.14 PLANET output (ELMP) short circuit.
E2.01 Incoming water valve open circuit.
E2.02 Incoming air valve open circuit.
E2.03 Bowl rinse valve open circuit.
E2.04 Cup filling valve open circuit.
E2.05 Main Control PCB output open circuit warning.
E2.06 Separator pulse valve open circuit.
E2.11 Separator start signal open circuit / Microvac valve open circuit.
E2.12 Assistant syringe water valve open circuit.
E2.13 Separator alarm reset signal open circuit.

Table 44: General error messages
ERROR EXPLANATION
CODE
E2.15 Not used or not in the manuals.
E3.1 Incoming air pressure compared to water pressure is too low.
E3.2 Internal water pressure too low.
E3.4 Internal air pressure (after regulator) is too low.
E3.5 Internal air pressure (after pres. regulator) is too high.
E3.6 Waterline cleaning feed pressure too low.
E3.7 Waterline cleaning flush pressure too low.
E4.1 Short circuit in cable from MCB to control panel / suction holder in branch 1.
E4.2 Short circuit in cable from MCB to control panel / suction holder in branch 2.
E4.3 Communication bus (CAN) is not operational or CAN devices are disconnected
(foot controller, operation light, motorised headrest).
E4.4 Communication bus (Console CAN) is not operational.
E5 Unsupported device attached.
E6.01 Cuspidor up -safety circuit error.
E6.02 Cuspidor down -safety circuit error.
E6.03 Chair down -safety circuit error.
E6.04 Bowl up -safety circuit error.
E6.05 Bowl down -safety circuit error.
E6.07 Console up -safety circuit error.
E6.08 Console down -safety circuit error.
Table 45: Power supply related error messages
ERROR EXPLANATION
CODE
E7 Power supply related error messages. IPS voltage failure on MCB.
E9 Internal operating voltage too low. Unit functionality may be limited.
E10 Internal operating voltage too high.
E11.1 OP-light fuse (F5) and/or Water heater fuse (F7) has blown on the MCB.
E11.2 Separator fuse (F6) and/or Syringe heater fuse (F8) has blown on the MCB.
E11.3 Either of the +24V electronics fuses (F9 or F10) has blown on the MCB.
E11.4 Rectifier D5 or D1 short circuit or either of the 24V electronics fuses (F3 or F4)
has blown on the MCB. Chair, instrument and headrest control not allowed.
E11.5 Separator fuse (F5) has blown on the MCB.
E11.6 Water heater fuse (F6) has blown on the MCB.
E11.7 Syringe heater fuse (F7) has blown on the MCB.
E11.8 Polymerisation light fuse (F8) has blown on the MCB.

Table 45: Power supply related error messages
ERROR EXPLANATION
CODE
E12.1 SELV voltage too low. Unit functionality may be limited.
E12.2 SELV voltage too high.
E13 Mains frequency outside acceptable range.
E14 IPS temperature measurement sensor error.
E15 IPS heatsink is running too hot on MCB.
E16 Attached scaler electronics is of new type.
E16.1 New type of scaler electronics is attached to MCB.
E16.2 New type of scaler electronics is attached to IMUX.
E16.3 Scaler electronics slot does not match with scaler hose connection.
E16.4 Other instrument than scaler is connected to slot where scaler electronics is.
E17 Power Supply related error messages.
E18 Power Supply related error messages.
Table 46: Control panel related error messages
ERROR EXPLANATION
CODE
E19.1 Control panel in branch 1 is of new type.
E19.2 Control panel in branch 2 is of new type.
E20.1 Control panel 1 button stuck.
E20.2 Control panel 2 button stuck.
E21 Control panel related error messages.
E22 Control panel related error messages.
Table 47: Instrument related error messages
ERROR EXPLANATION
CODE
E23 Polymerisation light bulb has blown or is not properly attached to socket.
E23.1 Instrument overtemperature error.
E23.2 Micromotor error; phase missing.
E23.3 Instrument undervoltage error.
E23.4 Instrument power protection error.
E23.5 Instrument EEPROM error.
E23.6 Instrument overvoltage error.
E23.7 Instrument data communication error.
E23.8 Instrument unspecified error.
E25 Satelec mini LED polymerisation light requires newer IMUX PCB version.

Table 48: Instrument multiplexer related error messages
ERROR EXPLANATION
CODE
E28.1 Reference resistor signal out of bounds when unit is switched on.
E28.2 Active instrument signal out of bounds.
E28.3 Syringe signal out of bounds.
E28.4 Reference resistor signal out of bounds when instrument is activated.
E28.5 Syringe signal changes during use (blinking).
E29 Voltage error in fibre light power supply in IMUX.
E32.1 IMUX is not responding. IMUX cable disconnected or failure in cable or IMUX.
E32.2 IMUX software is not compatible (IMUX is of new type) with MCB software.
E32.3 IMUX data error (cable short circuit).
E32.4 IMUX communication error.
E32.5 Wrong IMUX type or wrong unit type.
E33.1 Syringe select valve short circuit.
E33.2 Instrument 1 select valve short circuit.
E33.6 Instrument multiplexer related error messages.
E33.7 Drive/Cooling air valve short circuit.
E33.8 Air coolant valve short circuit.
E33.9 Water coolant valve short circuit.
E34.1 Syringe select valve open circuit.
E34.2 Instrument 1 select valve open circuit.
E34.6 Instrument multiplexer related error messages.
E34.7 Drive/Cooling air valve open circuit.
E34.8 Air coolant valve circuit.
E34.9 Water coolant valve circuit.
E35.1 Drive/Cooling air pressure sensor output <0.2 V.
E35.2 Air coolant pressure sensor output <0.2 V.
E35.3 Water coolant pressure sensor output <0.2 V.
E35.4 Differential pressure sensor output <0.2 V.
E36.1 Drive/Cooling air measurement over range.
E36.2 Spray air measurement over range.

Table 48: Instrument multiplexer related error messages
ERROR EXPLANATION
CODE
E36.3 Spray water measurement over range.
E36.4 Differential pressure sensor output >5 V.
E37 Pressure sensor cable not properly attached to IMUX.
E39 Drive (cooling) air valve control servo cannot maintain pressure to instrument.
E42 Air coolant (spray air) control servo cannot maintain required pressure.
E45 Water coolant (spray water) control servo cannot maintain required pressure.
Table 49: Suction holder related error messages
ERROR EXPLANATION
CODE
E47 Suction holder is of new type.
E47.1 Suction holder in branch 1 is of new type.
E47.2 Suction holder in branch 2 is of new type.
E48.1 No suction holders detected.
E48.2 Suction holder related error messages.
E49.1 Suction holder PCB or its cable is faulty in branch 1.
E49.2 Suction holder PCB or its cable is faulty in branch 2.
E50 Unidentified STCS jumper configuration.
E50.1 WMS must be set to Bottle water off -mode when starting STCS cleaning
sequence.
Table 50: Foot control related error messages
ERROR EXPLANATION
CODE
E51.1 Foot control related error messages.
E51.2 Foot control is not responding.
E51.3 Foot control pedal was pressed down when dental unit was switched on.
E51.4 Foot control pedal was not in home pos. when dental unit was switched on.
E51.5 Foot ctrl chair ctrl knob was not in home pos. when dent. unit was switched on.
E51.6 Foot control left knob is either stuck or active at power-up or after pedal use.
E51.7 Foot control right knob is either stuck or active at power-up or after pedal use.
E52 Foot control is of new type, update MCB software.
E52.1 Incompatible wireless foot control receiver software.
E52.2 Incompatible wireless foot control software.
E52.3 Incompatible foot control software.

Table 50: Foot control related error messages
ERROR EXPLANATION
CODE
E53 Foot control data error (cable short circuit).
E54.0 Foot control error.
E54.1 Foot control EEPROM write failure.
E54.2 Foot control EEPROM read failure.
E54.3 Pedal too far from sensors, channel A.
E54.4 Pedal too far from sensors, channel B.
E54.5 Sensor plate is tilted too much to either side, checksum error.
E54.6 Sensor plate is too close to PCB, channel A.
E54.7 Sensor plate is too close to PCB, channel B.
E54.8 Foot control re-trigger error.
E54.9 Foot control calibration error.
E55 Wireless foot control connection lost
Table 51: Operating light related error messages
ERROR EXPLANATION
CODE
E56 Operating light erroneously connected or short circuit in push button.
E57 Incompatible SingLED software
E58 Operating light bulb burned out.
Table 52: Separator system related error messages
ERROR EXPLANATION
CODE
E59.1 Separator reports functional error.
E59.2 Separator reports functional error.
E60 Separator is not responding or separator cable is faulty.
E61 Separator is flooded with too much water.
E62 Newly attached separator is of new type and cannot be controlled by MCB.
E63.1 WMS seems to be installed, although it should not be (according to service
mode).
E63.2 No WMS is installed, although it should be according to service mode.

Table 53: Patient chair related error messages
ERROR EXPLANATION
CODE
E64 Lift motor position potentiometer or its cable is faulty or disconnected.
E65 Lift motor does not run or no signal from position potentiometer.
E65.1 Lift motor does not run. EmeStop relay PCB/cables or position sensor/cable
may be faulty.
E66 Lift motor or its position potentiometer cable has a wrong connection.
E67 Backrest position potentiometer or its cable is faulty or disconnected.
E68 Backrest motor does not run or no signal from position potentiometer.
E68.1 Backrest motor does not run. EmeStop relay PCB/ cables or position sensor/
cable may be faulty.
E69 Backrest motor or its position potentiometer cable has a wrong connection.
E70.1 Lift motor error.
E70.2 Backrest motor error.
Table 54: MAIN CPU related error messages
ERROR EXPLANATION
CODE
E72.1 Program (Flash-EPROM) error. Main software is corrupted. Replace Flash-
EPROM.
E72.2 Program (Flash-EPROM) error. Boot software is corrupted. Replace Flash-
EPROM.
E72.3 Program (Flash-EPROM) error.
E72.4 Data transfer error while updating main PCB SW from control panel memory
device.
E73.1 EEPROM error, CPU EEPROM erase/program failure, replace CPU.
E73.2 CPU configuration register contents are wrong, replace CPU.
E73.3 CPU EEPROM checksum error.
E73.4 CPU EEPROM checksum programmed. Replace CPU if error occurs often.
E75.1 CPU error, WD reset.
E75.2 Illegal OP-code.
E75.3 Illegal vector.
E75.6 Mains voltage failure.
E75.7 Clock monitor reset.
E76 Main PCB hardware test failed.
E79 IMUX water pressure cannot be released during waterline cleaning cycle.
E79.1 IMUX water pressure rose during waterline cleaning cycle when pressure rise
was not expected.

Table 55: Headrest related error messages
ERROR EXPLANATION
CODE
E80.1 Motorised headrest is not found (according to service mode configuration).
E80.2 Motorised headrest is found, but is not set in service mode configuration.
E80.3 Headrest joystick (dentist side) stuck or cable broken.
E80.4 Headrest joystick (assistant side) stuck or cable broken.
E80.5 Motorised headrest motor A potentiometer or cable is faulty or disconnected.
E80.6 Motorised headrest motor B potentiometer or cable is faulty or disconnected.
E80.7 Motorised headrest length potentiometer or cable is faulty or disconnected.
E81 Motorised headrest communication error (may be too old or wrong software or
loose cables or short circuit).
E81.1 Motorised headrest communication error.
E82 Headrest SW is incompatible with MCB SW.
E82.1 Headrest SW is incompatible with MCB SW.
E82.2 Incompatible headrest software.
E90 Water leak detected.
E90.1 Water leak detected. Water use allowed temporarily.
Table 56: Maintenance related errors
ERROR EXPLANATION
CODE
E91 Yearly maintenance overdue.
Table 57: Software upgrade error messages
ERROR EXPLANATION
CODE
E99 Software upgrade failure.
E99.1 MCB software upgrade failure.
E99.2 IMUX software upgrade failure.
E99.3 Control panel software upgrade failure.
E99.4 Operating light software upgrade failure.
E99.5 Motorised headrest software upgrade failure.
E99.6 Foot control software upgrade failure.
E99.7 Wireless foot control software upgrade failure.
E99.8 Wireless foot control receiver software upgrade failure.
E99.9 RFID reader software upgrade failure.

Table 58: Error messages generated by control panel
ERROR EXPLANATION
CODE
EP19.3 Control panel version mismatch.
EP19.5 Control panel software upgrade has failed or memory card is faulty.
EP21.1 Control panel display is faulty.
EP21.2 Control panel data error.
EP21.5 Unable to read Main PCB software version.
EP21.6 Control panel software not installed or software error.
EP21.7 Touch panel is not working.

3 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF ERROR MESSAGES Chapter E: HELP & ERROR MESSAGES
3 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF ERROR MESSAGES
3.1 General error messages
E1 Main water valve short circuit

All valve and extra outputs on the MCB are short-circuit protected. Additionally, the MCB
CPU system is able to read the signal levels on the output pins. Therefore, the following
detailed information can be presented about the possible short circuit.
These errors can only be detected when the circuit is active.
Disconnect the valve or output indicated and check if the error disappears. Otherwise the
problem must be in the cable, or as the last possibility, on the MCB. If the error does not
disappear even if the valve cable on the MCB is disconnected, then the MCB must be
replaced.
E2 Incoming water valve open circuit

The following list indicates which output is causing the trouble.
These errors can be detected when the circuit is dead.
Disconnect the connectors at the end of the indicated bad valve (load). Measure with an
ohmmeter that the valve resistance is in the range 50-300 ohm. Disconnect the valve
connector on the MCB and check the condition on the indicated valve cable wires. Check
that both disconnected wires are OK.
E3 Incoming air pressure compared to water pressure is too low

The internal air pressure (after the internal pre-regulator) must always be 100kPa higher
than the internal water pressure (after the internal pre-regulator). Otherwise the
membranes in the IMUX do not close properly. Normally this never causes a problem,
except for the cases when the system compressor is accidentally turned off during the use
of the unit. Check that the incoming pressure is according to specifications. Also measure
(and readjust if necessary) the internal pressures of the unit. Use either an external
manometer attached to the syringe, or use the internal service mode system for the check.
Check also the condition of the water and air filters. Look for any kinks in the air tube going
to the IMUX.
Check the condition of the input pressures to the unit. Is an external valve or compressor
accidentally closed? Check the water and air filter. Check the internal pressures (and
adjust if needed).
E3 Internal water pressure too low

Make sure dental unit water inlet has proper pressure. Ensure that main water valve is
functional. Faulty water regulator or pressure sensor may cause this error also.
E3 Waterline cleaning flush pressure too low

Make sure dental unit water inlet has proper pressure. Ensure main water valve is
functional. Faulty water regulator or pressure sensor may cause this error also.

Chapter E: HELP & ERROR MESSAGES 3 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF ERROR MESSAGES
E4 Short circuit in cable from MCB to control panel / suction holder

in branch 1
The problem must be in the cable, or as the last possibility on the control panel PCB or
suction holder PCB or MCB. Localise the short circuit in the cable, and repair the cable or
replace it. If the error does not disappear, the control panel PCB or suction holder PCB or
MCB must be replaced.
E4 Communication bus (CAN) is not operational or CAN devices

are disconnected (foot controller, operation light, motorised
headrest)
Cable short circuit or faulty device may cause this problem. Remove and check devices
connected to CAN bus (foot controller, operation light, motorised headrest) one by one to
see if error disappears.
E4 Communication bus (Console CAN) is not operational

Cable short circuit or faulty device may cause this problem.
Remove devices connected to console can bus (IMUX, PlanID reader) to see if error
disappears.
Make sure console CAN adapter PCB(115-10-38) is version A2 or later
E5 Unsupported device attached

Compact i Classic does not support the use of certain devices. Contact service for
necessary upgrade.
E6 Cuspidor up -safety circuit error

Safety circuit self-check failed.
E6 Cuspidor down -safety circuit error

E6 Chair down -safety circuit error

E6 Bowl up -safety circuit error

E6 Bowl down -safety circuit error

E6 Console up -safety circuit error

E6 Console down -safety circuit error


3.2 Power supply related error messages
E7 Power supply related error messages. IPS voltage failure on

MCB
The IPS output voltage is too high. Disconnect the cable to the IMUX on the MCB. If the
error still appears, then the MCB IPS power supply is faulty. If the MCB is OK, check the
condition of the IMUX cable by disconnecting it both at the IMUX and the MCB. Measure
all wires for shorts between each other as well as the chassis. Replace the cable or the
IMUX.
E9 Internal operating voltage too low. Unit functionality may be

limited
Ensure that the mains voltage is according to the type label. Ensure that the mains voltage
stays within the given limits also when driving the patient chair. If mains voltage is ok,
ensure that the voltage selector jumper on the MCB corresponds to the voltage on the
type label. If all aforementioned items are in order, replace the MCB.
E10 Internal operating voltage too high

E11 OP-light fuse (F5) and/or Water heater fuse (F7) has blown on
the MCB
Change the fuse. If the fuse blows again, find out the reason for the short circuit by
connecting the cables one by one to a dead MCB and starting the unit. The cable whose
connection blows the fuse is probably shorted out.
E11 Separator fuse (F6) and/or Syringe heater fuse (F8) has blown
on the MCB
E11 Either of the +24V electronics fuses (F9 or F10) has blown on
the MCB
E11 Rectifier D5 or D1 short circuit or either of the 24V electronics

fuses (F3 or F4) has blown on the MCB. Chair, instrument and
headrest control not allowed

E11 Separator fuse (F5) has blown on the MCB

E11 Water heater fuse (F6) has blown on the MCB

E11 Syringe heater fuse (F7) has blown on the MCB

E11 Polymerisation light fuse (F8) has blown on the MCB

E12 SELV voltage too low. Unit functionality may be limited

E13 Mains frequency outside acceptable range

The mains frequency is measured by the MCB and is needed to synchronise both patient
chair AC motors and the OP-light operation. If the mains frequency is OK and the error still
appears (with possible OP-light flickering), the MCB must be replaced. Refer to service
mode (SM) 7.
E14 IPS temperature measurement sensor error

The voltage from the temperature sensor is outside the normal operating range. Visually
check the board around the heatsink for any damage. Replace the MCB.
E15 IPS heatsink is running too hot on MCB

All power semiconductors on the MCB are attached to the same heatsink. For proper
cooling, this heatsink must be attached properly to the left side to the electronics control
box. Check that the two screws are in place and tight. When the heatsink temperature
reaches the maximum allowed (60 °C) this error is generated. The CPU on the MCB first
turns off the OP-light and then also the output power to the dental instruments, if the
temperature still rises a few degrees. This safety feature makes it impossible to overheat
the MCB heatsink.
E16 Attached scaler electronics is of new type

The recently attached scaler electronics module cannot be used since the current version
of the software on the MCB does not have up-to-date information. All other functions are in
use, except for the new scaler. Update the MCB software.

3.3 Control panel related error messages
E19 Control panel in branch 1 is of new type

The recently attached new control panel is of a new type and cannot be controlled. Make
sure that the control panel is connected to the correct branch or update the MCB software.
The decimal “n” indicates which control panel is of the new type.
E20 Control panel 1 button stuck

When the power is turned on, the unit checks that no buttons are pressed on the control
panel(s). The decimal “n” indicates which control panel(s) has the failed button.
3.4 Instrument related error messages
E23 Polymerisation light bulb has blown or is not properly attached

to socket
The MCB monitors the current flowing from the IPS to the polymerisation light bulb. If the
current is abnormally small, this error is generated. Check the bulb and the condition of the
bulb socket. Some lights (LYSTA) have in series with the bulb connected a temperature
fuse that might have triggered (overheating). Check also the condition of the quick-
connector pins. If it still does not come on, check that the micromotor or the scaler
operates to make sure that the cables in the arm between the MCB and IMUX are OK.
E23 Instrument overtemperature error

Ensure that the instrument handpiece is in proper condition. Heavy use for long time may
cause overtemperature error.
E23 Micromotor error; phase missing

Check that the micromotor and hose are connected. If the problem persists, the
micromotor may be faulty or the hose broken. Contact service.
E23 Instrument unspecified error

Instrument unspecified error.
E25 Satelec mini LED polymerisation light requires newer IMUX

PCB version
The use of the Satelec mini LED requires newer IMUX PCB version.
3.5 Instrument multiplexer related error messages
E28 Reference resistor signal out of bounds when unit is switched

on
The hose ID measurement signal is out of bounds. If this error only occurs with one
instrument, check the condition or corrosion of the quick connector pins. Replace the
hose. Visually check the IMUX for any water leakage or corrosion on the PCB. Replace
the IMUX if necessary.

E29 Voltage error in fibre light power supply in IMUX

The fibre-light voltage regulator is not able to regulate the voltage to the fibre-light bulbs.
During this error the instruments containing a fibre-light (turbines, micromotors and
syringes) are not activated, to save the bulb from destruction. If this problem only occurs
with one instrument, try first to replace the hose for that instrument before replacing the
whole IMUX.
E32 IMUX is not responding. IMUX cable disconnected or failure in

cable or IMUX
The MCB generates this error if there is any reason why it cannot communicate with the
IMUX.
E33 Syringe select valve short circuit

All valve outputs on the IMUX are short-circuit protected and can withstand short circuits.
Additionally, the IMUX CPU is able to read the level on the output pins. Therefore the
following detailed information can be presented about possible short circuits. These
errors can only be detected when the circuit is active. Disconnect the valve indicated and
check if the error disappears. Otherwise the problem must be in the valve or its cable, or
as the last possibility, on the IMUX. If the error does not disappear even if the valve
connector is disconnected, then the IMUX must be replaced.
E35 Drive/Cooling air pressure sensor output <0.2 V

Check that the indicated pressure sensor pins are properly inserted in the mating sockets
on the PSB. Check also that they are not bent or broken. Check the condition of the ribbon
cable between the IMUX and the PSB. Check that it is not pinched between the IMUX and
the console bottom. Check with working PSB with sensors attached. Replace the IMUX if
the error is still there. If you have disassembled the sensor block, check that the
orientation of the sensors is OK.
E36 Drive/Cooling air measurement over range

Perform the same check as with error E35.n.
E37 Pressure sensor cable not properly attached to IMUX

The cable is probably loose or not attached to the IMUX ribbon cable connector properly
(all sensor signals simultaneously out of bounds). Check also that the PSB is mounted
properly so all pressure sensor pins mate with respective sockets. Check that the ribbon
cable is properly manufactured (connectors are the right way around - pin 1 to pin 1).
Check with a working PSB and replace the IMUX, if necessary.
E39 Drive (cooling) air valve control servo cannot maintain

pressure to instrument
The proportional valve gets full power, but still the measured pressure does not reach the
required level. The most probable reason is that there is something reducing the air flow
so that the pressure cannot reach the required level even if the control valve is fully open.
Check for air tube kinks inside the unit and console arm. Check the condition of the
incoming air pressure regulator and also the air filter. Check that the incoming air pressure
is within recommendations. The control valve in the IMUX could also cause this problem.
Replace the valve as a last remedy.

E42 Air coolant (spray air) control servo cannot maintain required
pressure
required level. The most probable reason is that there is something reducing the air flow
so that the pressure cannot reach the required level even if the control valve is fully open.
Check for air tube kinks inside the unit and console arm. Check the condition of the
incoming air pressure regulator and also the air filter. Check that the incoming air pressure
is within recommendations. The control valve in the IMUX could also cause this problem.
Replace the valve as a last remedy.
E45 Water coolant (spray water) control servo cannot maintain

required pressure
required level. The most probable reason is that there is something reducing the water
flow so that the pressure cannot reach the required level even if the control valve is fully
open. Check for water tube kinks inside the unit and console arm. Check the condition of
the incoming water pressure regulator and also the water filter. Check that the incoming
water pressure is within recommendations. The control valve in the IMUX could also
cause this problem. Replace the valve as a last remedy.
3.6 Suction holder related error messages
E47 Suction holder is of new type

The recently attached suction holder is of a new type and it is not recognised by the
control system. Update the MCB software. The new software is also compatible with the
older type suction holders.
E48 No suction holders detected

If the information given to the unit in the service mode is in conflict with the detected
number of suction holders, this error is generated. The unit is aware of a built-in
separator, but cannot find a functioning suction holder. Either the holder is missing or
faulty, or the cable to the holder is loose or faulty.
E49 Suction holder PCB or its cable is faulty in branch 1

Either the holder is missing or faulty, or the cable to the holder is loose or faulty. The
problem can be intermittent.
E50 Unidentified STCS jumper configuration

Unidentified STCS jumper configuration. Check STCS J4 jumper.
6 = Manual system (Jumper J4 1-2)
5 = Pump operated system (Jumper J4 3-4)
3 = Centralised system (Jumper J4 5-6)

3.7 Foot control related error messages
E51 Foot control related error messages

The foot control cable is disconnected from the unit, or the cable is open circuited, or the
foot control has failed. Check if the foot control gets power by checking that its internal
status-LED is blinking. Try to recalibrate the foot control, see Technical Manual, section
"Calibrating foot control" in chapter Foot control for details.
E52 Foot control is of new type, update MCB software

The recently attached foot control is of a new type, or its software is not compatible with
the MCB software. Update the MCB software. The new software on the MCB is also
compatible with the older version(s) of the Prostyle Compact foot controls.
E53 Foot control data error (cable short circuit)

The data signal is short circuited to ground. Check the condition of the foot control cable
and replace it, if necessary. Try with another foot control to determine the location of the
problem. Check also the condition of the internal foot control cable going from the MCB to
the foot connector at the rear of the unit base.
E54 Foot control error

These errors inform that the foot control calibration failed for some reason.
E55 Wireless foot control connection lost

Wireless foot control and wireless foot control transmitter are on different channels.
Connection can be restored by changing the transmitter channel. See service modes for
further details.
3.8 Operating light related error messages
E56 Operating light erroneously connected or short circuit in push

button
This error can occur only during selftest at power-up. If the momentary push button is
shorted during the test, this error is generated. The button could be damaged, or the
reason can be a wrong connection so that the bulb and button are cross-connected. The
electronics refuses to turn on the output power to the operating light, until the short has
been removed (or the connection has been corrected). This feature protects the OP-light
push button from destruction. The button should not be pressed when powering on the
unit, to avoid a false error.
3.9 Separator system related error messages
E59 Separator reports functional error

The separator is signalling an error output (either Metasys (59.1) or Dürr (59.2)). Please
check the separator documentation.

E60 Separator is not responding or separator cable is faulty

The stand-by signal is missing from the separator (valid only for Dürr or Metasys). Either
the separator is faulty, or the cable between the MCB and separator is faulty. Check that
the separator is reaching a power supply voltage. Check that the separator cable is
plugged in to the MCB properly.
E61 Separator is flooded with too much water

This error can occur only if the unit is equipped with a Microvac separator. The error is
generated if the water level inside the Microvac rises too high. The reason can be a too
fast water flow to the separator compared with the handling capacity of the drain. Check
the drain, clean the bottom cup under the Microvac. If necessary, replace the Microvac
separator.
E62 Newly attached separator is of new type and cannot be

controlled by MCB
The newly attached separator is of a new type and cannot be controlled by the MCB.
Update the MCB software. Check that the separator connector is properly connected and
none of the wires are loose.
E63 WMS seems to be installed, although it should not be

(according to service mode)
WMS error
3.10 Patient chair related error messages
E64 Lift motor position potentiometer or its cable is faulty or

disconnected
This error occurs if the output signal from the position potentiometer wiper is close to 0V.
This indicates that the cable is disconnected, or the wiper or the hot end of the
potentiometer is open-circuited (cable or potentiometer fault).
E65 Lift motor does not run or no signal from position potentiometer
There can be several reasons for this error, but they can easily be divided into 3
categories to be more easily understood;
a) If the motor runs and the chair’s lift mechanism moves: The error must be in the
potentiometer, its cable or on the MCB. Visually check the condition of the potentiometer.
If the potentiometer’s axle is rotating together with the worm screw, then check the cable
from the potentiometer all the way to the MCB. Turn off the power and use and ohmmeter
to do the checking. If the potentiometer and its cable seem to be ok, you can additionally
check the reading from the potentiometer with the help of service mode n.76 that shows
the potentiometer signal on the unit display. Connect an external potentiometer directly to
the MCB and use the service mode to check that the MCB is OK.
b) The motor does not run, but there is a faint humming sound from the motor. Check that
the movement has not reached either of the mechanical limits. Is the chair overloaded
(>150 kg load)? Is there any other mechanical obstruction? Check that the motor capacitor
is properly connected and that the capacitor is OK. Check that the motor cable is OK (you
should be able to measure the resistance of both windings at the connector that connects
to the MCB).

c) The motor is completely dead. Is the motor very hot? It is possible to overheat the motor
if you run it continuously for more than about 2 minutes, or if the motor runs more that 13%
of the time. When the motor heats up, the built in over-temperature switch disconnects the
common wire, resulting in a temporarily dead motor. When the motor cools down (this can
take 10 - 20 min.) it returns back to normal operation. Check also the connector and
cables to the motor, if it is not overheated, but still dead.
E66 Lift motor or its position potentiometer cable has a wrong

connection
This error can occur only if you install a new motor or potentiometer and either of these
have a cable with crossed conductors. In other words, the potentiometer signal (or motor
running direction) is opposite to what it should be. Check that the cable(s) are according to
the drawings. This error could occur also if the motor direction relay on the MCB has
failed. Check that the direction relay is toggling when trying to drive the mechanism
alternatively in both directions.
E67 Backrest position potentiometer or its cable is faulty or

disconnected
Refer to the explanation for the lift motor (error E64), since both motor drives are equal.
E68 Backrest motor does not run or no signal from position

potentiometer
Refer to the explanation for the lift motor (error E65), since both motor systems are equal.
E69 Backrest motor or its position potentiometer cable has a wrong

connection
Refer to the explanation for the lift motor (error E66), since both motor systems are equal.
3.11 MAIN CPU related error messages
E75 CPU error, WD reset

These errors do not necessarily indicate a hardware error.
E79 IMUX water pressure cannot be released during waterline

cleaning cycle
This error occurs if:
- Main water valve leaks or is stuck open.
- Water consuming instruments are stuck or handpiece water adjustment knob is closed.
- Water pressure sensor is out of order.
- Instrument multiplexer membranes are stuck. WCS or WMS pressure must be calibrated.

3.12 Headrest related error messages
E81 Motorised headrest communication error (may be too old or

wrong software or loose cables or short circuit)
Headrest communication error (may be too old software, wrong software, loose cables or
short circuit).
E82 Headrest SW is incompatible with MCB SW

Motorised headrest software is incompatible with current dental unit software. Update the
motorised headrest software by entering service mode n.303 and pressing the SET-button
(or the S-button if you do not have a touch panel). Do not switch off the dental unit while
the update is going on.
E90 Water leak detected

Water leak sensor has detected a leak. Check inside the unit for water leaks.
E90 Water leak detected. Water use allowed temporarily

Water use allowed temporarily. Check for water leakage inside dental unit.
3.13 Maintenance related errors
E91 Yearly maintenance overdue

Yearly maintenance has not been performed within the specified period.
3.14 Software upgrade error messages
E99 Software upgrade failure

Make sure upgrade media is properly connected and contains a valid software package.
E99 MCB software upgrade failure

Software package may have been corrupt or hardware failure on MCB.
E99 IMUX software upgrade failure

Software package may have been corrupt or hardware failure. Check connection between
MCB and IMUX.
E99 Control panel software upgrade failure

MCB and control panel.
E99 Operating light software upgrade failure

MCB and operating light.

E99 Motorised headrest software upgrade failure

MCB and headrest.
E99 Foot control software upgrade failure

MCB and foot control.
E99 Wireless foot control software upgrade failure

MCB and wireless foot control.
E99 Wireless foot control receiver software upgrade failure

MCB and wireless foot control receiver.
E99 RFID reader software upgrade failure.

MCB and RFID reader.
3.15 Error messages generated by control panel
EP19.3 Control panel version mismatch

Update the main PCB or control panel software.
EP19.5 Control panel software upgrade has failed or memory card

is faulty
Insert the updated software media into the control panel.
EP21.1 Control panel display is faulty

Replace the control panel.
EP21.2 Control panel data error

Ensure that the control panel data cable is properly connected.
EP21.5 Unable to read Main PCB software version

The main PCB software may not support the control panel, or the control panel data cable
is not properly connected.
EP21.6 Control panel software not installed or software error

Insert the updated software media into the control panel.


Chapter F: ROMEXIS CONNECTION
CONFIGURATION
4 BASIC CONFIGURATIONS
4.1 Introduction
The configurations described in this section (Basic configurations) are common for all
configurations in the following sections. Detailed configuration instructions can be found in
the Planmeca Romexis technical manual (10037884).
Before you start Romexis server and unit connection configuration, read the instructions in
the Planmeca Romexis technical manual, Chapter C: Post-installation on Windows,
section Romexis server and unit connection configuration.
The Romexis symbol on the dental unit’s control panel indicates the state of the
connection.
Symbol Dental unit network settings Connection between Planmeca

Romexis and dental unit
Romexis connection enabled On
Romexis connection enabled Off
No symbol Romexis connection disabled Off
4.2 Configuring Planmeca Romexis server settings

For instructions, see the Planmeca Romexis technical manual, Chapter C: Post-
installation on Windows, section Configuring Planmeca Romexis server settings.
4.3 Configuring network connection between Planmeca Romexis and

Planmeca Compact i Touch/Classic
Planmeca Compact i Touch
installation on Windows, section Configuring Planmeca Compact i Touch v2 connection.
Planmeca Compact i Classic

installation on Windows, section Configuring Planmeca Compact i Classic v2 connection.

5 CONFIGURING TOUCHPAD FUNCTIONALITY Chapter F: ROMEXIS CONNECTION CONFIGURATION
4.4 Planmeca Romexis licence

The Planmeca Romexis software requires a licence. For instructions on how to activate
the licence, see the Planmeca Romexis technical manual, Chapter B: Installation on
Windows, section Activating Planmeca Romexis license.
If you are going to use the Planmeca Romexis Clinic Management module, make sure that
the licence includes the Planmeca Romexis Clinic Management module.
4.5 Configuring Planmeca Romexis Clinic Management

installation on Windows, section Clinic Management configuration.
5 CONFIGURING TOUCHPAD FUNCTIONALITY

To be able to use the dental unit’s touch panel as a touchpad, the following steps must be
performed.
1. Perform the basic configurations described in section 4 "BASIC CONFIGURATIONS"
on page 179.
2. Follow the instructions in the Planmeca Romexis technical manual, Chapter C: Post-
installation on Windows, section Configuring dental unit touchpad functionality.
These configurations must be performed separately for each Romexis Client PC.
6 CONFIGURING REMOTE OPERATION OF

INTRAORAL CAMERA
To be able to operate the intraoral camera remotely from Planmeca Romexis, the
following steps must be performed.
on page 179.
installation on Windows, section Configuring intraoral camera.
3. Follow the instructions in the Panasonic intraoral camera user’s and installation
manual (10032056), section Installing camera to dental unit.

Chapter F: ROMEXIS CONNECTION CONFIGURATION 7 CONFIGURING REMOTE OPERATION OF PL-
7 CONFIGURING REMOTE OPERATION OF

PLANMECA INTRAORAL SCANNER
To be able to operate the Planmeca intraoral scanner remotely from Planmeca Romexis,
the following steps must be performed.
on page 179.
installation on Windows, section Configuring Planmeca PlanScan scanner.
3. Follow the instructions in the Planmeca PlanScan dental unit integration installation
instructions (10037386), section Planmeca Compact i Touch v2 / v1.
8 CONFIGURING STORING AND MANUAL

TRANSFER OF SETTINGS TO ROMEXIS CLIENT
NOTE
This function requires the Planmeca Romexis Clinic Management module licence.
Users can manually transfer and store the unit settings in Planmeca Romexis. To enable
this function, the following steps must be performed.
on page 179.
2. To activate the changes, restart the dental unit and the Romexis client.
9 CONFIGURING AUTOMATIC TRANSFER OF

SETTINGS TO ROMEXIS CLIENT
NOTE
This function allows automatic transfer and storage of user settings to Planmeca Romexis
when the user signs out from the dental unit. It also allows automatic transfer of user
settings to the dental unit when the user signs in to Planmeca Romexis. To enable this
function, the following steps must be performed.
on page 179.
installation on Windows, section Configuring Planmeca Compact i dental unit
automatic user settings storing and transfer.

10 CONFIGURING UNIT MONITORING, LOGS, SUMMARIES AND HYGIENE INSTRUCTIONS Chapter F:
10 CONFIGURING UNIT MONITORING, LOGS,

SUMMARIES AND HYGIENE INSTRUCTIONS
NOTE
The Planmeca Romexis Clinic Management module enables you to monitor and control
most activities performed with the dental unit. In addition, you can view dental unit quick
guides and hygiene instructions.
on page 179.
11 CONFIGURING SERVICE CONTACT DETAILS

NOTE
The service contact details give the users information on whom to contact when they need
technical assistance. These details can be stored into Planmeca Romexis, from where
they are sent to the dental unit when the user signs in to the unit. The service contact
details can also be edited from the dental unit, but these details are only applicable until
the next time the dental unit contacts Planmeca Romexis, after which the locally edited
details are replaced by the contact details from Planmeca Romexis.
on page 179.
installation on Windows, section Configuring service contact details sending from
Romexis to dental units.
12 CONFIGURING DEVICE ALERT E-MAILS

NOTE
The Planmeca Romexis Clinic Management module allows you to configure the dental unit
to send alert e-mails to selected Planmeca Romexis users every time a specified help or
error message is issued.
on page 179.
installation on Windows, section Configuring of sending device alert e-mails.

Chapter G: PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE
1 INTRODUCTION
Preventive maintenance must be performed once a year by a qualified service technician.
The maintenance interval is typically 12 months, but under certain circumstances and
conditions approved by Planmeca, the maintenance interval can be extended to 18
months. Please contact Planmeca for further information.
The dental unit has a counter that keeps track of when the last yearly maintenance was
performed and how many days are left until the next yearly maintenance. To reset this
counter, you must confirm the completion of the yearly maintenance after performing the
maintenance. For instructions, see section "Yearly maintenance" on page 44.

2 MAINTENANCE KIT Chapter G: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2 MAINTENANCE KIT
The maintenance kit (part number 10030698) contains the parts that must be replaced in
the yearly maintenance.
1 Suction tube 2300 mm 12 Sealing rubber

2 High-volume suction tube 2300 mm 13 Magnet valve
3 O-ring for regulator block assembly 14 Rubber feet
4 Water filter membrane 15 O-ring for pressure sensor assembly
5 Air filter membrane 16 Foot control case assembly
6 Poppet 17 Foot control pedal knob
7 Coarse filters 18 O-ring for oil cup
8 Gasket 1/8 for regulator block 19 Control membrane
assembly
9 Bowl filter 20 Return air filter
10 Cover cap 21 O-ring for bowl assembly
11 Filters 22 O-ring for regulator block assembly

Chapter G: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 3 CUSPIDOR
3 CUSPIDOR
3.1 Fuses
• Check the condition of the fuses.
3.2 Lift motor

• Check the operation of the lift motor.
• Clean and grease the worm screw. If there is any rust on the worm screw or nut, or if
they are worn, replace them. Additionally, if you find any rust or damage, check for
signs of leaks and eliminate the cause of the leaks.
3.3 Bowl
• Replace the bowl filter and cover cap (maintenance kit items 10 and 11).
• Replace the o-ring of the bowl assembly (maintenance kit item 22).
• Check the operation of glass filling/bowl rinsing.
• Check the operation of the bowl microswitch.
3.4 Suction tubes

• Replace the suction tubes (maintenance kit items 1 and 2).
3.5 Coarse filters

• Replace the coarse filters (maintenance kit item 8).
3.6 Water regulator

• Replace the filter (maintenance kit item 12).
• Replace the membrane (maintenance kit item 5).
• Replace and lubricate the plug (maintenance kit item 7).
• Check for leaks.
3.7 Air regulator

• Replace the filter (maintenance kit item 12).
• Replace the membrane (maintenance kit item 6).

3 CUSPIDOR Chapter G: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
3.8 Regulator block assembly

• Check and replace when needed the o-rings and gaskets that are marked in the
picture below.
(maintenance kit item 3) (maintenance kit item 23)
(maintenance kit item 9)
(maintenance kit
item 9)
3.9 Microvac II suction system

The Microvac II suction system has its own maintenance kit (part number 10011453).
• Replace the middle bottom membrane.
• Replace the bottom drain membrane.
• Replace the pressure balancing membrane.
• Replace the rubber sealing.
3.10 Other suction systems

Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
3.11 Clean water system

• Check the operation of the Clean water system.
3.12 Suction tube cleaning system

• Check the feeding time calibration. Calibrate if needed, see section 5 "CALIBRATING
SUCTION TUBE CLEANING SYSTEM FEEDING TIME" on page 227.
3.13 Waterline cleaning system

• Clean and grease the O-ring (10002949) that is between the lid and the collar with uni
silicone.
• Check and adjust the water pressure, see section 6 "ADJUSTING WATERLINE
CLEANING SYSTEM WATER PRESSURE" on page 228.

Chapter G: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 3 CUSPIDOR
3.14 WEK water disinfection system

• Replace the external water filter (WEK maintenance kit item 16)
Dental units that are equipped with the Planmeca WEK water disinfection system have an
own maintenance kit (part number 10037557) that includes the Metasys WEK service kit.
1 Suction tube 2300 mm 12 O-ring bolt for regulator block

assembly
2 High-volume suction tube 2300 mm 13 Gasket 1/8 for regulator block
assembly
3 Magnet valve 14 Cover cap
4 O-ring for regulator block assembly 15 Bowl filter
5 Foot control case assembly 16 Water filter, external, DVGW approved
6 Foot control pedal knob 17 Filter
7 Sealing rubber 18 Air filter membrane
8 Rubber feet 19 Coarse filter
9 Control membrane 20 Return air filter
10 O-ring for bowl assembly 21 10035868 Metasys WEK service kit
11 O-ring for oil cup

4 FOOT CONTROL Chapter G: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
3.15 Internal air and water pressures

• Check the pressures with service mode 38. Adjust if needed, see section 3.1
"Adjusting internal water & air pressures" on page 224.
4 FOOT CONTROL
• Replace the case assembly, pedal knob and rubber feet (maintenance kit items 17, 18
and 15).
• Check the operation of the foot control.
• Calibrate the foot control.
5 INSTRUMENT CONSOLE
5.1 Oil collector

• Clean the collector.
• Replace the filter and O-rings (maintenance kit items 21 and 19).
5.2 Instrument hoses

• Replace the sealing rubber for instrument quick-connectors (maintenance kit item 13).
• Check the condition of the instrument hoses. Replace if needed.
• Check the condition of the quick-connectors. Replace if needed.
• Check if there are any leaks.
• Ensure that the hole on the instrument hose outer surface is clearly visible.
5.3 Instrument multiplexer

• Replace the water valve (maintenance kit item 14).
• Replace the control membranes (maintenance kit item 20).
• Check the operation of the O-rings for the pressure sensor assembly (maintenance kit
item 16). Replace if needed.
5.4 Instrument arms

• Check the condition of the instrument arms and instrument holders. Replace if
needed.
5.5 Instruments
• Check the operation of the instruments. For maintenance instructions, refer to the
instrument manufacturer’s manuals.

Chapter G: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 6 MECHANICAL STABILITY
5.6 Control panel

• Check the operation of the control panel.
For testing the touch panel, see section "GUI diagnostics" on page 44.
6 MECHANICAL STABILITY
Check the mechanical stability without dismantling the dental unit, i.e. visually or with
moderate force (e.g. shake or lever).
Check:
• Floor attachment screws
• Lifting column screws
• Lift adapter axle attachment screws
• Chair adapter attachment bolts (at joint of lifting adapter)
• Chair adapter attachment screws inside chair
• Arm assembly attachment screws (top of cuspidor)
• Patient mirror attachment on Planmeca SingLED
7 DELIVERY ARMS
7.1 OP delivery arm

• Check the friction of the OP delivery arm. Adjust if needed, refer to section 1.2
"Adjusting friction of OP delivery arm joints" on page 204.
• Check the balance of the OP delivery arm. Adjust if needed, refer to section 1.3
"Adjusting balance of OP delivery arm" on page 205.
7.2 Side delivery arm

• Check the friction of the side delivery arm. Adjust if needed, refer to sections 1.5
"Adjusting side delivery arm base joint friction" on page 212, 1.6 "Adjusting friction of
side delivery arm joint" on page 213, 1.7 "Adjusting side delivery arm instrument
console friction" on page 213 and 1.8 "Adjusting lifting friction of side delivery arm" on
page 214.

8 PATIENT CHAIR Chapter G: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
8 PATIENT CHAIR
8.1 Backrest motor

• Check the operation of the backrest motor.
• Clean and grease the worm screw.
8.2 Safety switches

• Check the operation of the safety switch.
8.3 Upholsteries
• Check the condition of the upholsteries.
• Check that the upholsteries are firmly in place.
• Check that the screws of the seat upholstery are tightened.
9 SUCTION ARM
• Check the friction of the suction arm. Adjust if needed, see section 1.10 "Adjusting
friction of adjustable suction arm" on page 216.
10 OPERATING LIGHT
• Check the operation of the sensor.
• Check the operation of the operating light from the control panel.
• Check the friction of the operating light arm. Adjust if needed, see Planmeca SingLED
installation manual.

Chapter G: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 11 ELECTRICAL SAFETY
11 ELECTRICAL SAFETY
These measurements must be performed after installation, electrical parts replacement
and during preventive maintenance.
All the measurements shall be performed using a IEC62353 compliant measurement
device. The unit shall be separated from the supply mains (live, neutral and protective
earth) during the measurements.
NOTE
General tip: if a measurement point is in a visible part, avoid scratching by using magnet or
metal foil between the measurement point and test clip.
NOTE
A special power cable (1) or power adapter cable (2) can be ordered from Planmeca. These
cables can be used between the dental unit and the tester.
1. Test power cord EU cable, part number 30007567

2. Test power adapter C14 cable, part number 30007568

11 ELECTRICAL SAFETY Chapter G: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Disconnect the cable from the Main control PCB connector P25 (1). Connect the test cable
to this connector (2). Attach the test cable grounding lead to the ground terminal (3).
11.1 Protective earth resistance

Shall be performed with at least 200mA current and the resistance between protective
earth terminal and the following measurement points shall not exceed 300m.

Measurement points
Protective earth terminal.
1. Instrument console cover (in balanced arm console, attachment screws).

2. Instrument console bottom (in balanced arm console, threads).
3. Instrument console bottom (in hanging tube console, threads).

4. Last pivot of the suction holder (attachment screw).
5. Chair lift motor

6. Base casting
7. Backrest motor

8. Chair frame
9. Water heater (optional)

10. Motorised headrest (optional)
11. Planmeca SingLED (optional) light head screw
12. Monitor (optional) grounding lead attachment screw

13. Planmeca ProX (optional) tube head screw

11.2 Insulation resistance

Shall be performed with 500V (DC) voltage and the mains switch of the unit shall be
switched ON. No dielectric breakdown shall happen during the measurement.
WARNING
Risk of electric shock due to high voltage! Do not touch the unit during testing.
Applied parts needed in the measurements are instruments in the instrument console and
suction holder that contains metallic conductive parts (scaler, micromotor, syringe, curing
light, turbine, for instance).
Do not measure non-earthed accessible conductive part, because there are not any.
Measurements
1. Between the mains part (L and N together) and protective earth
2. Between the mains part (L and N together) and the applied parts (all the instruments
with conductive metallic parts)
3. Between the protective earth and the applied parts (all the instruments with
conductive metallic parts)

11.3 Equipment leakage current

Shall be measured with Alternative method, since in this type of measurement the unit is
turned OFF due to short-circuited L and N. Leakage current shall not exceed 1000µA AC.
Alternative method
Measurement
1. Measure with all the applied parts (dentist and assistant instruments with conductive
metallic parts), L, N and PE connected to measurement device.
11.4 Patient leakage current

Shall be measured with Alternative method, since in this type of measurement the unit is
turned OFF due to short-circuited L and N. Leakage current shall not exceed 5000µA AC.
WARNING
Risk of electric shock due to high voltage! Do not touch the unit during testing.
Alternative method
Measurement
1. Measure with all the applied parts (dentist and assistant instruments with conductive
metallic parts), L, N and PE connected to measurement device.


Chapter H: ADJUSTMENTS
1 MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS
1.1 Adjusting vertical position of OP delivery arm column

The console arm column must be vertical. You may have to adjust its position, if the floor
is very inclined.
Console arm
To adjust the vertical position of the

console column:
- Remove the bowl.
- Remove the cuspidor covers.
Console arm - Adjust the position of the console arm
column adapter with the three M8x12 DIN 913
adjustment screws (1 and 2).
- Reassemble in reverse order.
Console arm adapter

Comp9_19.eps
1 2
Adjustment screws

1 MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS Chapter H: ADJUSTMENTS
1.2 Adjusting friction of OP delivery arm joints
To adjust the rotational friction of the console

arm column:
1. Remove the small cover plate from the
cuspidor cover.
1 2. Unscrew the two M5x10 screws and
remove the holder plate.
3. Adjust the friction with the adjustment
screw located on the console arm column (1).
4. Reassemble in reverse order.
Comp9_20.eps
Adjust the rotational friction

of the console arm with the 4
mm Allen key. Adjust the two
screws equally to avoid
wearing. Tightening the
screws increases the friction.
Adjust the rotational friction of the instru-

ment console with the 4 mm Allen key.
Adjust the two screws equally to avoid
wearing. Tightening the screws increases
the friction.
Adjust the lifting friction of the

console arm with the 4 mm
Allen key. Tightening the screw
increases the friction.

Chapter H: ADJUSTMENTS 1 MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS
1.3 Adjusting balance of OP delivery arm
1.3.1 Adjusting balance

The adjustment plate, which is connected to the gas spring, is held in position with the
spring support. To increase or decrease the tension of the gas spring, the position of the
spring support compared to the adjustment plate must be altered. This is done with the aid
of the adjusting hook, which is pushed by a screwdriver (use a robust, round-shaped (not
six-edged) screwdriver with a diameter of 4.5 - 5.5 mm).
Gas spring Adjustment plate
Adjusting hook
Spring support
y-spring
1.3.2 Increasing tension of gas spring (more load)

1. Lower the console arm to its lowest position.
Adjusting hook
varsikuvaI-1.eps
The spring support is holding the gas spring at the preset

tension. Adjusting hook is hanging freely.

2. Insert a screwdriver into the arm (through the opening at the underside of the arm)
and push the adjusting hook (inside the arm) into a groove of the adjustment plate.
Make sure that the screwdriver goes through the hole in the y-spring. Insert the
screwdriver into the arm perpendicularly towards the arm.
NOTE
Do not let the screwdriver go through the groove on the adjustment plate to avoid
damaging the tubes above the adjustment plate.
Adjusting hook
varsikuvaI-2.eps
Adjusting plate
90˚
Hole in the y-spring
Adjusting hook goes into a groove of the adjustment plate
3. Hold the screwdriver inside the arm and lift the arm to its highest position, while
keeping the screwdriver in the same position compared to the arm.
varsikuvaI-3.eps
Adjusting hook moves the adjustment plate away from

the instrument console and the hook of the spring
support moves to the next groove of the adjusting plate.

4. Remove the screwdriver from the arm.
varsikuvaI-4.eps
The adjusting hook stays in the groove of

the adjustment plate.
5. Lower and lift the arm a couple of times.

varsikuvaI-5.eps
The adjusting hook releases from the groove. The spring

inside the adjustment mechanism pushes the spring support
into a groove of the adjustment plate. The tension of the gas
spring is now increased by one step.
6. Repeat the procedure if necessary. There are totally seven steps to increase the
tension of the gas spring (from the fully decreased spring).

1.3.3 Decreasing tension of gas spring (less load)

1. Move the console arm to horizontal position (or a little below the horizontal plane).
varsikuvaD-1.eps
The spring support is holding the gas spring at the

preset tension. Adjusting hook is hanging freely.
2. Insert a screwdriver into the arm (through the opening at the under side of the arm)
and push the adjusting hook (inside the arm) into a groove of the adjustment plate.
Make sure that the screwdriver goes through the hole in the y-spring. Insert the
screwdriver into the arm at the right angle (90°) compared to the arm.
90˚
varsikuvaD-2.eps
Adjusting hook goes into a groove of the adjustment plate.
3. Hold the screwdriver inside the arm in the same position compared to the arm and lift
the arm to its highest position.
varsikuvaD-3.eps
90˚
Both the adjusting hook and the spring support

stay in the grooves of the adjustment plate.

4. Turn the handle of the screwdriver towards the instrument console and hold it in that
position. Do not turn the screwdriver more than 30° to avoid damaging the y-spring.
varsikuvaD-4.eps
~30˚
The spring support is released from the groove.
5. Lower the arm to horizontal position while holding the screwdriver at the same
position compared to the arm.
varsikuvaD-5.eps
~30˚
6. Remove the screwdriver from the arm.

varsikuvaD-6.eps

7. Lower the arm to its lowest position.
varsikuvaD-7.eps
The adjusting hook releases from the groove. The y-spring

inside the adjustment mechanism pushes the spring support
into a groove of the adjustment plate. The tension of the
gas spring is now decreased by one step.
8. Repeat the procedure if necessary. There are totally seven steps to decrease the
tension of the gas spring (from the fully increased spring).
1.3.4 Problems in adjusting gas spring

If the tension of the gas spring can not be adjusted, the y-spring may be damaged. In this
case the gas spring can be adjusted as follows:
After step 3 in section 1.3.2 "Increasing tension of gas spring (more load)" on page 205 or
step 5 in section 1.3.3 "Decreasing tension of gas spring (less load)" on page 208, do not
remove the screwdriver from the arm, but turn the handle of the screwdriver carefully away
from the instrument console (see figure below) while lowering the arm. This will help the
hook of the spring support to go into the groove.
varsikuvaD-8.eps

1.4 Adjusting angle of OP delivery arm instrument console

1. Remove the lifting arm cover.
2. Remove the ø8 DIN 471 locking ring and pull out the lower joint pin (short).
3. Adjust the angle of the instrument console by turning the lower joint adjustment screw
with a 15mm set wrench. The angle is preset at the factory to level with the rotating
arm.
4. Assemble the lower joint in reverse order.
The angle is preset at the factory

to level with the rotating arm.
Locking ring
ø8 DIN 471
Lower joint
adjustment screw
Lower joint
pin (short)
Lifting arm cover

1.5 Adjusting side delivery arm base joint friction
Remove the base joint cover plate.

Adjust the rotational friction of the horizontal
arm with the 5 mm Allen key.
Tightening the screw increases the friction.
Horizontal arm

1.6 Adjusting friction of side delivery arm joint
Adjust the rotational friction of the lower joint

by turning the adjustment bolt with 10 mm
fork spanner.
1.7 Adjusting side delivery arm instrument console friction

Adjust the rotational friction of the instrument console with the adjustment screw located
below the instrument console. There is a black washer below the adjustment screw
(attachment screws do not have washers).
Friction adjustment screw

1.8 Adjusting lifting friction of side delivery arm

1. Remove the level arm cover by first pulling it from its upper end with both hands as
shown on the figure below. After detaching the upper end the cover can be lifted away
from its position.
2. Adjust the lifting friction of the delivery arm with the 5 mm Allen key. Adjust the two
screws of the level arm friction block equally. Tightening the screws increases the
friction.
3. Attach the level arm cover back to its position.

1.9 Adjusting tension of side delivery arm gas spring

1. Remove the level arm cover by first pulling it from its upper end with both hands as
shown on the figure below. After detaching the upper end the cover can be lifted away
from its position.
2. Before adjusting the tension of the gas spring decrease the lifting friction of the side
delivery arm with the 5 mm Allen key. Adjust the two screws of the level arm friction
block equally. Loosening the screws decreases the friction.

3. Adjust the tension of the gas spring by rotating the adjustment screw (located in the
lower end of the gas spring) with the 6mm Allen key as shown on the figure below.
Turning the screw clockwise will increase the tension, i.e, the weight-carrying
capacity.
4. Adjust the lifting friction of the delivery arm with the 5 mm Allen key.
5. Attach the level arm cover back to its position.
1.10 Adjusting friction of adjustable suction arm

Loosen the holding screw at the side of the optional suction arm joint with the 2 mm Allen
key. Adjust the rotational friction of the joint with the 4 mm Allen key. Tightening the screw
increases the friction. Lock the screw into position with the holding screw.
Loosen the screw

with 2 mm Allen key.
Adjust with 4 mm Allen key.

1.11 Removing play of lifting adapter
CAUTION
When removing the play of the lifting adapter, tightening the screws that adjust the
sliding support and the colliding support is recommended to be done by hand. Over-
tightening the screws will increase friction and cause wearing to the sliding support
and the colliding support.
1.11.1 Removing vertical play

1. Loosen the M8 DIN 934 nut that is securing the colliding support in position.
2. Remove the vertical play by tightening the M8x25 DIN 913 screw with a 4mm Allen
key (1).
3. Tighten the M8 DIN 934 nut to secure the colliding support into position while holding
the screw with the Allen key.
4. Repeat the above for the other colliding support.
1.11.2 Removing sideways play

1. Unscrew the M8x12 ULS screw holding the sliding support in position and remove the
two ø8.4 DIN 9021washers.
2. Remove the sideways play with two M6x16 DIN 916 screws (2).
3. Screw the M8x12 ULS screw and the washers back into position. Use some locking
agent to secure the screw into position.
4. Repeat the above for the other sliding support.
M8 DIN 934 nut
2
Comp_lift_adap_110313.eps

2 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS Chapter H: ADJUSTMENTS
2 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
2.1 Calibrating touch panel

1. Start the dental unit by pressing the ON/OFF switch at the rear of the unit base.
2. When the unit is starting up (see picture below), tap the display continuously until you
hear a beep. The beep indicates that the calibration mode is activated.
NOTE
When you hear the beep, stop tapping the start-up display.

Chapter H: ADJUSTMENTS 2 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
3. The following display appears:
Calibration marker
4. Small calibration markers appear on the display in order: first one in each corner and
then one in the middle. Tap each marker to calibrate the touch panel.
When the calibration is finished, the dental unit will continue the start-up.
2.2 Calibrating backrest motor position sensor
WARNING
During the calibration of the backrest motor position sensor all software limits are
ignored. Special care must be taken for not to damage the unit by driving the back-
rest to its mechanical limits.
1. Enter service mode 80. The display will show letter “b” (for backrest) followed by two
horizontal lines.
2. Enable backrest motor movements by holding down the SET button for 10 seconds
(until you hear a beep).

3. Using the minus (-) and plus (+) buttons on the touch panel, drive the backrest into a
position where the calibration mark on the chair casting and the lug of the spindle nut
assembly are aligned.
Spindle nut
assembly
4. Loosen the two M3x6 DIN 916 screws at the side of the cog wheel of the sensor (1).

5. Rotate the axle of the sensor with a screwdriver (2) until the two horizontal lines on
the display are in line.
b –_ b–– b ––
The sensor presumes the back- The backrest position sen- The sensor presumes the back-
rest to be at a too low position. sor is calibrated correctly. rest to be at a too high position.
Rotate the sensor axle counter Rotate the sensor axle clockwise
clockwise (seen from the axle). (seen from the axle).
6. Tighten the two M3x6 DIN 916 screws to secure the cog wheel into position.
7. Using the minus (-) button, drive the backrest downwards and after the lowest position
is reached continue pressing the minus (-) button for approx. 2 seconds to drive the
backrest to horizontal position. Check that the spindle nut does not touch the cog
wheel or potentiometer.
8. Drive the guiding nut past the calibration mark a couple of times to ensure that the
sensor is now calibrated correctly (the horizontal lines are aligned).
9. Exit the service mode.
2.3 Calibrating lift motor position sensor
WARNING
During the calibration of the lift motor position sensor all software limits are ignored.
Special care must be taken for not to damage the unit by driving the lifting adapter
to its mechanical limits.
1. Enter service mode 79. The display will show letter L (for lift motor) followed by two
horizontal lines.
2. Enable lift motor movements by holding down the SET button for 10 seconds (until
you hear a beep).

3. Using the minus (-) and plus (+) buttons on the touch panel, drive the lifting adapter to
position where the upper edge of the adapter and the calibration mark at the side of
the lifting column are aligned.
The upper edge of the lifting adapter

and the calibration mark at the side
of the lifting column are aligned.
4. Loosen the two M3x6 DIN 916 screws holding the cog wheel of the sensor in position.

5. Rotate the axle of the sensor with a screwdriver until the two horizontal lines on the
display are in line.
L– _ L– – L– –
The sensor presumes the lifting The sensor is calibrated The sensor presumes the lifting
adapter to be at a too low position. correctly. adapter to be at a too high position.
Rotate the axle counterclockwise Rotate the axle clockwise (seen from
(seen from the axle). the axle).
6. Tighten the two M3x6 DIN 916 screws to secure the cog wheel into position.
7. Drive the lifting adapter past the calibration mark a couple of times to ensure that the
sensor is now calibrated correctly.
8. Exit the service mode.
2.4 Rewiring mains voltage selection jumper
WARNING
Erroneously wired voltage selection jumper may cause serious damage to the
equipment.
The mains voltage selector jumper (connector P21 on the Main control PCB) is used to
select the transformer winding to correspond with the mains voltage. Since the transformer
is connected using the back-to-back method, the same transformer can be used for
different mains voltages. Voltage selection jumpers for different mains voltages can also
be ordered as spare parts.
1. Select the mains voltage by connecting pin 3 and one of the pins 4 - 6 together.
The same voltage setting jumper is also used to bypass the neutral line fuse. In some
areas it is not allowed to have a fuse in the neutral wire, thus the neutral line fuse
must be bypassed.
2. Bypass the neutral line fuse by connecting the pins 1 and 2 together.
CONNECTED PINS SELECTED MAINS

VOLTAGE
6
10
5
11 0V 3&6 100V~
4
5 ~
22 V~
3
0 - 3&5 115V~
CO
2
2
MM 40V~
1
ON 3&4 220-240V~
N
FU EUT
SE RA
BY L L
PA IN
SS E

3 PNEUMATICAL ADJUSTMENTS Chapter H: ADJUSTMENTS
3 PNEUMATICAL ADJUSTMENTS
3.1 Adjusting internal water & air pressures

The filter/regulators control the internal water and air pressures. There are two ways to
monitor the pressures while adjusting the regulators: manually with a manometer
(pressure gauge) or using the unit’s own pressure sensors. The manometer is connected
to the head of the syringe handpiece and the pressures are adjusted similarly as explained
for adjusting the pressures using the unit’s own pressure sensors.
3.1.1 Air pressure

1. Enter service mode 38. Press the minus (-) button to enter the air pressure mode. The
unit automatically closes down the main water valve and releases the internal water
pressure via the flush valve into the drain. The internal air pressure is shown on the
display. The pressure is shown in bars (1bar = 100kPa = 14.5psi).
2. Lift the cap of the air filter/regulator upwards and adjust the internal air pressure by
turning the regulator cap. Balance the pressure from the syringe air valve after every
adjustment. The factory preset value for the internal air pressure is 5.5 bar.
3. Lock the filter/regulator to the adjusted position by pushing down the regulator cap.
3.1.2 Water pressure

1. Enter service mode 38. Press the plus (+) button to enter the water pressure mode.
The unit automatically closes down the main air valve and releases the internal air
pressure via the instrument multiplexer. The internal water pressure is shown on the
display. The pressure is shown in bars (1bar = 100kPa = 14.5psi).
2. Lift the cap of the water filter/regulator upwards and adjust the internal water pressure
by turning the regulator cap. Balance the pressure from the syringe water valve after
every adjustment. The factory preset value for the internal water pressure is 2.8 bar.
3. Lock the filter/regulator to the adjusted position by pushing down the regulator cap.
Lift to adjust,
push down to lock.
+
-
AdjBurk_Inal_press.eps
Factory preset values:

* water pressure 2.8 bar
* air pressure 5.5 bar

Chapter H: ADJUSTMENTS 3 PNEUMATICAL ADJUSTMENTS
3.2 Adjusting syringe water and air flow rates

The water and air flow rates for the syringe are adjusted from the two brass screws located
on the syringe instrument multiplexer block. Both the water and air flows for the syringe
can also be blocked by these screws.
1. Open the instrument console cover by unscrewing the M6x16 DIN 7984 screw from
under the instrument console and open the console cover.
Adjust the syringe water flow rate from the water flow rate adjuster on the top of the
syringe instrument multiplexer block. Do not adjust the flow below minimum limit given by
the syringe manufacturer. Observe the adjusted flow rate with the syringe instrument.
2. Adjust the syringe air flow rate from the air flow rate adjuster on the instrument arm
side of the syringe instrument multiplexer block. Observe the adjusted flow rate with
the syringe instrument.
Air flow rate adjuster
Water flow rate adjuster
3.3 Adjusting air and water to instruments

The water and air flow rates for each instrument are adjusted in the instrument settings
program mode. Please refer to the User’s manual for programming the instrument
settings.

4 BLEEDING OF SPRAY WATER SYSTEM Chapter H: ADJUSTMENTS
4 BLEEDING OF SPRAY WATER SYSTEM

NOTE
Always make sure that the instrument hose is correct for the used instrument. The control
system identifies the instrument hose, not the instrument. The control system does not
recognise the instrument change.
NOTE
Make sure that the hoses are properly connected to the console to avoid leakage.
1. Activate the instrument (turbine or micromotor).

2. Press the instrument spray button to turn on the spray water.
3. Drive the activated instrument with the foot control.
661100__vvooss
sov_016
610_vos
4. Loosen the bleeding screw until the water bleeds out (while the instrument is running).
NOTE
If the water is not bleeding out properly then loosen the two nuts a little. When the
bleeding is done then tighten the nuts again.
5. Tighten the bleeding screw so that the water flow stops.

6. Release the foot control and return the instrument to its place.
7. Remove the label, attach the console cover and place the instrument in its position.

Chapter H: ADJUSTMENTS 5 CALIBRATING SUCTION TUBE CLEANING SYSTEM FEEDING TIME
5 CALIBRATING SUCTION TUBE CLEANING

SYSTEM FEEDING TIME
1. Remove the dosing cubic from the STCS box.
2. Enter service mode n.150 and enter the SET-mode. Start the water flow by pressing
the green start button.
3. Wait until the water surface is just above the overflow opening and stop the water flow
by pressing the yellow cancel button.
4. Exit the service mode. The water flow is now calibrated.

6 ADJUSTING WATERLINE CLEANING SYSTEM WATER PRESSURE Chapter H: ADJUSTMENTS
6 ADJUSTING WATERLINE CLEANING SYSTEM

WATER PRESSURE
1. Carefully detach the adapter cover from its position. The container assembly sensor is
attached behind the adapter cover.
2. Switch on the unit. (Turn the air pressure on.)

3. Turn the main water tap off with the black waterline switch (i.e. the switch to the
horizontal position). Fill the container with water and attach it to its position.

Chapter H: ADJUSTMENTS 6 ADJUSTING WATERLINE CLEANING SYSTEM WATER PRESSURE
Entering service mode:

• Press Program.
• Press Service mode.
• Enter the PIN-code: 1701.
• Press OK to confirm the PIN-code.
PIN code
4. Enter service mode n 38 by using the up and down buttons on the touch panel.
The current service mode number (symbol “n” followed by the current service mode
number) is shown on the display when moving around in the list.
The service mode number disappears after 1 second, after which the current service
mode setting or value is displayed.
Select the water pressure measurement mode by pressing the plus (+) button. The
letter “H” followed by the current setting is shown on the display.
5. Decompress the water pressure with the syringe instrument.

6 ADJUSTING WATERLINE CLEANING SYSTEM WATER PRESSURE Chapter H: ADJUSTMENTS
6. Pull the pressure adjustment knob downwards and adjust the pressure by turning the
knob until the service mode setting is between 1.2-1.5 bar. In case the pressure
exceeds the value 1.7 bar, decompress the water pressure with the syringe
instrument (or with bowl flushing/cup filling) and readjust the pressure.
7. Lock the pressure adjustment knob by pushing it up.

8. Remove the disinfection container.
9. Make sure, that the container assembly sensor is properly in its position. Attach the
adapter cover back to its position.
10. Switch off the unit.
NOTE
Ensure that one bottle of Planosil is enough for the waterline cleaning cycle. The bottle
must not be completely emptied! If one bottle is not enough, you can, for example,
decrease the glass fill flow rate.

Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT &
REPAIR
1 REMOVING COVERS
1.1 Cuspidor door

1. Open the cuspidor door.
2. Release the door opening limiter by unscrewing the M4x8 DIN 912 screw.
3. Lift the console arm side of the cuspidor top cover, unscrew the attachment screw and
remove the door joint sleeve.
4. Remove the cuspidor door by tilting it away from the cuspidor.
5. Assemble the cuspidor door into position in reverse order.
1.2 Cuspidor cover

1. Remove the side cover plate from the side of the cuspidor by pulling it away from the
cuspidor.
2. The cuspidor cover is attached to the cuspidor with Velcro tapes and attachment pins.
First detach the cover at the chair adapter side of the cuspidor by pulling it outwards.
Then pull the cover outwards at the other side of the cuspidor (see picture on the next
page).
3. Assemble the cuspidor cover into position in reverse order.
1.3 Lifting column cover

1. Drive the patient chair to its lowest position.
2. Detach the upper side of the lifting column cover by carefully bending it towards the
chair.
3. Remove the lifting adapter by pulling it upwards.

1 REMOVING COVERS Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR
4. Assemble the lifting column adapter into position in reverse order.
M4x8 DIN 912

1
Door opening 3 Lifting column cover
limiter
1
4 Door joint sleeve
Cuspidor top cover

2
1
Cuspidor door Side cover plate
Cuspidor cover

Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR 2 UPHOLSTERIES REPLACEMENT
2 UPHOLSTERIES REPLACEMENT
2.1 Headrest upholstery

1. Loosen the screw at the back of the headrest assembly.
2. Detach the headrest upholstery from the headrest assembly.
3. Attach the new headrest upholstery in reverse order.

2 UPHOLSTERIES REPLACEMENT Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR
2.2 Backrest upholstery

1. Detach the lower corners of the backrest upholstery and remove the upholstery:
pulling it towards seat and lift it up.
NOTE
If the chair is equipped with patient detection sensor, disconnect the sensor cable from the
backrest upholstery.
2. To attach the upholstery bend the upper part of the backrest upholstery firmly from its
sides (1) and slide the backrest upholstery upwards so the attachment hook goes into
the groove of the upholstery’s backplate (2). Press the upholstery against the velcro
tape counterparts (3)
3. Press firmly the upholstery outer edges.

2.3 Seat upholstery

1. Unscrew the upholstery screw opening cover plate attachment screw and remove the
cover plate.
2. Loosen the attachment screw by turning it clockwise.

3. Unscrew the other six screws as shown in the next figures.

4. Remove the cover plugs. Unscrew the screws shown in the figure below.

5. Slide the seat upholstery towards the footrest so that the attachment screw comes out
from the groove of the upholstery’s backplate. Remove the seat upholstery.
NOTE
If the chair is equipped with patient detection sensor, disconnect the sensor cable from the
backrest upholstery.
6. Slide the attachment plates to their positions at the new seat upholstery backplate as
shown in the figure below.
7. Attach the new seat upholstery in reverse order.

Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR 3 INSTRUMENT CONSOLE RELATED
3 INSTRUMENT CONSOLE RELATED
3.1 Attaching Bluetooth adapter to dental unit

To be able to make a Bluetooth connection between your tablet or smart phone and the
dental unit, you must attach a Bluetooth adapter to the USB-port in the instrument console.
1. Open the instrument console and attach the Bluetooth adapter to the USB-port as
shown in the figures below.
Instrument console with balanced instrument arms

3 INSTRUMENT CONSOLE RELATED Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR
Instrument console with hanging-tube instruments
2. Close the instrument console.

3.2 Preparations before instrument multiplexer related replacements

1. Enter service mode 13 and switch off the main water valve.
3. Turn off the power.
4. Decompress the air pressure with the syringe instrument.
5. Remove the instrument hoses by unscrewing the quick connectors.
6. Remove the instrument arms by pushing them from their positions.
7. Unscrew the M6x16 DIN 7984 screw from under the instrument console and open the
console cover.
3.3 Replacing entire multiplexer

1. Perform the pre-replacement preparations described in section 3.2 "Preparations
before instrument multiplexer related replacements" on page 241. Disconnect the
blue tube (air) from the angle nipple.
2. Remove the instruments and balanced arms.
3. Disconnect the green tube (water) from the nipple.
4. Disconnect the clear tube (instrument return air) from the nipple.
5. Disconnect the Instrument multiplexer cable from the connector P11 on the
Instrument multiplexer PCB.
6. Disconnect the Console grounding cable from the instrument console casting by
unscrewing the M4x8 DIN 912 screw.

7. Unscrew the M4x50 DIN 912 and M4x20 DIN 912 screws from sides of the
multiplexer assembly.
8. Lift the multiplexer assembly from the console casting.

9. Attach the new multiplexer to the instrument console. Attach the grounding cable to
the instrument console.
10. Connect the return air tube.
11. Connect the instrument multiplexer cable to the connector P11 on the Instrument
multiplexer PCB.
12. Connect the water tube coming from the console arm to the T-nipple of the valve
assembly.
13. Connect the arm air tube to the instrument multiplexer air nipple. Attach the
instrument control valve assembly to the console with the two M4x6 DIN 912 screws.
Make sure you place the instrument control valve assembly correctly; the water must
enter from the end marked with “1” on the assembly.
14. Make sure that the instrument control valve cable is connected to the connector P6 on
the Instrument multiplexer PCB.
15. Make sure that the cables and tubes are not squeezed or folded.
16. Close the instrument console cover. Attach the balanced arms and the instruments to
their places.
17. Bleed the multiplexer according to the instruction described in Chapter 4 "BLEEDING
OF SPRAY WATER SYSTEM" on page 226.

3.4 Attaching extra voltage feed cables to the Instrument multiplexer PCB
and to the Control connector board PCB
There are four separate voltage feed outputs in the two PCBs inside the console.
Following three are in the right corner of the multiplexer PCB (115-10-37):
• P25 outputs 24 Vac (marked CONN1 in warning label)
• P29 outputs +32 Vdc (marked CONN2 in warning label)
• P28 outputs +15 Vdc (marked CONN3 in warning label)
One voltage feed is located in the control connector board PCB (115-10-38) left from the
multiplexer:

• J6 outputs +24 Vdc (marked CONN4 on warning label)
These voltage feeds are used with certain instruments or with their possible electronic
boxes.
NOTE
Check the reference designator for connecting the cable to the right connector!

3.5 Replacing one multiplexer block (other than syringe)
CAUTION
Care must be taken when removing and installing the multiplexer block for not to
damage the quick connector pins that are attached to the Instrument multiplexer
PCB.
NOTE
Avoid bending the Instrument multiplexer PCB when removing and installing the
multiplexer block.

before instrument multiplexer related replacements" on page 241.
2. Remove the multiplexer assembly from the console casting as described in section
3.3 "Replacing entire multiplexer" on page 241.
3. Unscrew the five TORX WN1451 3x6 PT screws and remove the multiplexer plate.
4. Disconnect the instrument control valve (of the multiplexer block in question) from the
connector on the Instrument multiplexer PCB.
5. Unscrew the two M4 DIN980 nuts that keep the multiplexer blocks connected
together. Remove the blocking flange and unscrew the two spindle screws.
6. Unscrew the M4x6 DIN 912 screw that connects the multiplexer block in question to
the Instrument multiplexer PCB.
7. Remove the multiplexer block in question from the multiplexer assembly by pulling it
to the direction away from the Instrument multiplexer PCB.
8. Install the new multiplexer block in reverse order.
9. Bleed the multiplexer according to the instruction described in section 4 "BLEEDING
OF SPRAY WATER SYSTEM" on page 226
TORX WN1451 3X6 PT

Multiplexer plate
Detached multiplexer block
Spindle screw
Blocking flange
M4x6 DIN 912 M4 DIN 980

3.6 Replacing multiplexer control membrane

Every multiplexer block, except the syringe (next to the touch panel) has a control
membrane, which blocks air and water for the instrument (instrument not active).
NOTE
Care must be taken to position the new multiplexer control membrane correctly.
NOTE
Carefully tighten the screws equally and crosswise when repositioning the multiplexer block
cover. Using too much force might damage the threads in the multiplexer block.

2. Unscrew the four TORX WN1451 3x22 PT screws and one TORX WN1451 3x12 PT
screw from the multiplexer block to be repaired and remove the block cover.
3. Remove the spring and membrane press.
4. Install the new control membrane in reverse order.
TORX WN1451 3x12 PT

TORX WN1451 3x22 PT
Block cover
Spring
Membrane press
Multiplexer control
membrane

3.7 Replacing instrument control valve

Every multiplexer block has an instrument control valve (located next to the quick
connector housing). For instruments other than the syringe, the function of the valve is to
control the multiplexer control membrane and by that means water and air to the
instrument. For the syringe instrument, the valve controls directly water to the instrument.
3. Remove the multiplexer plate as described in section 3.5 "Replacing one multiplexer
block (other than syringe)" on page 245.
4. Disconnect the instrument control valve cable from the Instrument multiplexer PCB.
5. Unscrew the four M3x35 DIN 912 screws and remove the valve.
6. Install the new instrument control valve in reverse order.
Instrument control valve
M3x35 DIN 912
3.8 Replacing instrument multiplexer proportional valves

There are three instrument multiplexer proportional valves located at the touch panel end
of the multiplexer assembly. The function of the valves is to control water and air to the
whole multiplexer.
2. Disconnect the proportional valve cable from the Instrument multiplexer PCB for the
valve in question.
3. If replacing the spray water proportional valve, disconnect the grounding cable that is
connected to the valve with one of the four screws.
4. Unscrew the two of the four screws and remove the valve.
5. Install the new proportional valve in reverse order.
Unscrew these screws Proportional valve

to remove the valve.

4 ELECTRICAL PARTS REPLACEMENT Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR
4 ELECTRICAL PARTS REPLACEMENT
4.1 Upgrading Compact i Touch v2 software
NOTE
Do not turn off the unit until the upgrade is finished! A power cut during the software
upgrade may break the touch panel.
NOTE
The touch panel software must be compatible with the main software. Do not use
incompatible software versions. If you have installed an incompatible software version,
error message EP 19.3 is displayed. You can update the main software to match the GUI
software without an upgrade USB memory stick by following the steps below starting from
step 4.
NOTE
If you have installed a peripheral device with an old software, you can upgrade the software
without an upgrade USB memory stick by following the steps below starting from step 4.
NOTE
If the unit is equipped with a wireless foot control, you have to connect it to the charger and
wake it up by pressing the handle before starting the software upgrade.
NOTE
If E82.1 appears after the main and touch panel software is upgraded, the headrest
software must be upgraded.
Enter service mode 303 and press the SET button to upgrade headrest software on the
headrest PCB into a version that is on the MCB software chip. The unit will turn off and on
again and the headrest software is upgraded.
1. Check the unit type by pressing Program > About this unit.
The following is displayed.

Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR 4 ELECTRICAL PARTS REPLACEMENT
NOTE
The following is an example only and does not necessarily portray the actual
situation.
2. Make sure that the unit type is Compact i Touch v2 and that the software version is
7.0.4 or newer.
NOTE
If the unit type is Compact i Touch and the unit SW version 6.x.x.x, follow the upgrade
instructions in the Compact i Touch Technical Manual, Chapter G Parts replacement
and repair, section 4.1 Upgrading software.
3. Make sure you have the USB memory stick with the correct Compact i software
version.
4. Open the instrument console cover.
5. Insert the USB memory stick to the USB port in the touch panel assembly.
Units with serial number starting with UTIV/UPIT (Compact i Touch / Compact i Touch
v2):

Units with serial number starting with UTTF/UTTK (Compact i Touch with 2nd
generation Touch panel / Compact i Touch V2 with 2nd generation Touch panel):
6. Press Program.
7. Press the software upgrade button.

8. The following is displayed while the unit searches for an upgrade package.
9. The following is displayed after the upgrade package has been found. Only the
software that is shown in the view is upgraded.
Start the upgrade by pressing OK.
If you wish, you can cancel the upgrade by pressing Cancel.
NOTE
After this, the update cannot be cancelled.
NOTE
Cancel OK

10. The following is displayed after starting the upgrade. The progress of the update is
shown in a new window.
11. When the upgrade is completed, the dental unit reboots automatically.
12. Check the software versions by pressing Program > About this unit.
The following is displayed.
NOTE
NOTE
In software versions 7.1.0 or newer you can check all the peripheral software versions
by pressing “Unit SW Version” in the About this unit -window.
OK

13. Ensure that the correct unit software version and peripheral software versions have
been installed.
14. Press OK to close the window.
4.2 Upgrading Compact i Classic v2 software
NOTE
Depending on the updated devices, the display will show either the text PCC or the
progress of the update.
NOTE
The screen may flicker during the upgrade.
NOTE
EUsb is shown on the display, if there is an error with the USB stick.
1. Switch the unit off.

2. Attach the USB stick containing the Compact v2 software to the main board USB port.
3. Switch the unit on.
4. Go to service mode 500 and press SET to start the upgrade. The unit will reboot
automatically after the upgrade.
4.3 Upgrading guides and Compact i Touch GUI in Planmeca Romexis

1. Insert the upgrade USB memory stick to the Romexis server.
2. Run the RomexisGUI_update.bat script located on the USB memory stick.
3. Start a Romexis client and open a unit monitoring page.
Verify that the GUI is displayed on the unit monitoring page. If the GUI is not updated, the
text "Control Panel Download failed. Version : X.X.X.X.R" is displayed on the unit
monitoring page.

4.4 Replacing fuses
WARNING
Always replace fuses with the same type and rating.
Fuse Fuse Description Fuse Rating & Type

Panel
Code
F1 Mains fuse, Neutral Schurter 0001.1014 10A/250V/FAST ACTING/HIGH BR CAP. (100V,
115V)
F2 Mains fuse, Live
Bussmann S501-10-R 10A 250V FAST ACTING/HIGH BR CAP. (100V,
115V)
Schurter 0001.1012 6.3A/250V/FAST ACTING/HIGH BR CAP. (220V –
240V)
Bussmann S501-6.3-R 6.3A 250V FAST ACTING/HIGH BR CAP. (220V-
240V)
F3 Electronics 4A/250V/Fast act./High br. cap, Schurter 0001.1010 OR
Bussmann S501-4-R
F4 Electronics
F5 Separator 8A/250V/Fast act./High br. cap, Schurter 0001.1013 OR
Bussmann S501-8-R
F6 Water heater 6.3A/250V/Fast act./High br. cap, Schurter 0001.1012 OR
Bussmann S501-6.3-R
F7 Syringe 6.3A/250V/Fast act./High br. cap, Schurter 0001.1012 OR
Bussmann S501-6.3-R
F8 Selv 6.3A/250V/Fast act./High br. cap, Schurter 0001.1012 OR
Bussmann S501-6.3-R
NOTE
The mains fuse ratings depend on the selected voltage setting.

4.5 Replacing main control PCB
WARNING
The mains voltage is always present at the mains terminal on the main control PCB,
even if the unit is switched off from its own mains switch.
1. Turn off the power supply line or disconnect the unit from the mains power source.
2. Unscrew two attachment screws at the side of the electronics control box and open
the cover.

3. Remove the cable guide plate.
4. Disconnect all the cables that are connected to the main control PCB.
5. If the old main control PCB is equipped with Software license dongle (white arrow),
remove it from the old PCB and attach it to the new one.

6. Detach the main control PCB from the PCB holders. Remove the Voltage selector
jumper (connector P21) and emergency stop jumper (connector P35) from the old
PCB and attach them to the new one.
7. Install the new main control PCB in reverse order. All the cable connectors, except the
ones for the touch panel, suction arm and foot control cables, are unique and no other
cable can be connected to the connector than the one in question. All the cable
connectors are also labelled.
NOTE
After replacing the Main control PCB the dental unit automatically enters service mode
n.100 when the unit is switched on (see section "n.100 Select dental unit type" on page
122). The unit type must be selected before you can use the dental unit.
NOTE
If the dental unit software version is updated when replacing the main control PCB, you
must upgrade the GUI software to the same level.

NOTE
When you have set the factory presets for all service modes and the dental unit
configuration differs from the software factory preset values, you must edit the service
modes to suit the dental unit configuration. Check, for example, the values for service
modes n.83, n.84, n.100 and n.133.
4.6 Replacing instrument multiplexer PCB

3. Disconnect the five instrument control valve cables from the Instrument multiplexer
PCB.
4. Disconnect the three proportional valve cables from the Instrument multiplexer PCB.
5. Disconnect the Pressure sensor cable from the Instrument multiplexer PCB.

6. Unscrew five screws that attach the Instrument multiplexer PCB to the multiplexer
blocks.
7. Remove the Instrument multiplexer PCB by pulling it away from the multiplexer.
8. Install the new Instrument multiplexer PCB in reverse order.

9. Bleed the multiplexer according to the instruction described in section 4 "BLEEDING
OF SPRAY WATER SYSTEM" on page 226

4.7 Replacing touch panel PCB
NOTE
The touch panel PCB must not be disassembled in any case!
1. Unscrew the M6x16 DIN 7984 screw from under the instrument console and open the
console frame.
2. Disconnect the Instrument multiplexer cable from the connector P1.
3. Disconnect the Suction arm cable from the connector P3.
4. Unscrew the four TORX WN1451 3x6 PT screws and remove the Touch panel PCB.
5. Install the new Touch panel PCB in reverse order.
TORX WN1451 3x6 PT
Touch panel PCB
Console frame
4.8 Replacing suction sensor PCB

1. Unscrew the seven M4x10 PT screws from the bottom of the console.
2. Carefully open the console by pulling the two frames apart (detach the four
attachment tongues at the front edge). Avoid bending the frames when opening the
console.
3. Disconnect the suction holder cable from the suction sensor PCB.
4. To remove the old suction sensor PCB, unscrew the M4x8 PT screw from the bottom
of the suction sensor PCB.

5. Replace the suction sensor PCB with a new one and assemble the suction arm in
reverse order.
Console frame
D
B
88
88 A
S
repl keyboard consPCB.eps

Suction sensor
PCB
Suction holder cable
Screw M4x8 GE
RIN
SY OR R
TO
EC
EJ
IVA
AL
¬SCTION
SU
IVA
AL
¬SCTION
SU
Screws M4x10
Suction arm
4.9 Replacing transformer
WARNING
The unit must be switched off prior to transformer replacement.
1. Turn off the unit from the mains switch.

2. Open the cuspidor door and detach the cuspidor cover.
3. Support the delivery arm properly with tape.
4. Remove the glass bowl.
5. Disconnect all the cables and tubes coming from the floor.

6. Unscrew three attachment screws that hold the cuspidor on the floor.
7. Disconnect two transformer cables and water leakage sensor cable from the Main
PCB.
8. Turn the dental unit to its side as shown on the figure below.
9. Remove the water leakage sensor from the transformer casing (black arrow).
Unscrew four transformer attachment screws (white arrows). The transformer
assembly can now be removed from the base.

10. When attaching the new transformer assembly to its position, tentatively attach the
right side screws first to the base (1). Do not tighten the screws yet. Place the right
side of the casing below the screws and tighten the screws slightly. Attach the left side
screws (2) and tighten the screws equally.
2 1
11. Attach the water leakage sensor to the transformer metal frame.
12. Connect the cables to the Main control PCB.

13. Carefully lift up the unit. Lower the water leakage sensor to the floor level.
14. Connect all the cables and tubes and attach all removed parts.

4.10 Replacing position sensors

1. Drive the backrest motor or the chair lift motor to the sensor calibration position (refer
to section 2.2 "Calibrating backrest motor position sensor" on page 219 or 2.3
"Calibrating lift motor position sensor" on page 221 respectively). Do the driving in the
normal mode (not in the service mode).
2. Disconnect the position sensor cable.
3. Loosen the two M4x4 DIN 916 screws and remove the cog wheel.
4. Remove the position sensor by unscrewing the nut.
5. Assemble the new position sensor in reverse order.
NOTE
Never try to force the position sensor into the cog wheel, as it might cause the position
sensor to break.
NOTE
Care must be taken when assembling the position sensor for positioning the cog wheel
correctly compared to the threaded axle of the motor (see illustration below).
6. Calibrate the new position sensor as described in section 2.2 "Calibrating backrest
motor position sensor" on page 219 or in 2.3 "Calibrating lift motor position sensor" on
page 221 section respectively.
M5x12 DIN 7500
Position sensor
Position sensor plate
Washer
M4x4 DIN 916
Nut
Cog wheel
Cog wheel too close to the threaded axle Cog wheel too far from the threaded axle of
of the motor. The eccentricity of the axle the motor. The eccentricity of the axle causes
damages the position sensor. the cog wheel to slip and loose position.
Cog wheel
G G
N N Threaded axle
O O
W
R
W
R of the motor
C O R R E C T

4.11 Replacing the backrest motor capacitor
WARNING
Turn off the power supply line or disconnect the unit from the mains power source
before replacing the motor capacitor.
1. Remove the seat upholstery.

2. Disconnect the backrest motor cable from the capacitor cable.

3. Disconnect the chair cable from the capacitor cable and detach the connector from
the connector plate.
4. Unscrew the capacitor attachment nut using a 13 mm spanner.

5. Install the new capacitor in reverse order.

5 MOTORS REPLACEMENT Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR
5 MOTORS REPLACEMENT
5.1 Replacing backrest motor

1. In the case that the motor is somewhat operational, drive the backrest to the position
approx. 20° above the horizontal position.
2. Remove the backrest and seat upholsteries as described in section 2
"UPHOLSTERIES REPLACEMENT" on page 233.
3. Unscrew the attachment screw of the pushing rod cover (1) and slide the cover
towards the backrest motor (2). Lift the backrest so that you can push the pushing rod
pivot to away from position (3). Unscrew backrest joint pivot attachment screws using
the 4mm Allen key and push the backrest joint pivots away from the joints (4).
Remove the backrest.
4. Open the cable clamp located on the upholstery support plate (1). Remove the
upholstery support plate by unscrewing the three M6x10 DIN 912 screws (2).

Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR 5 MOTORS REPLACEMENT
5. Detach the legrest support bar from the spindle fork assembly by unscrewing the
attachment screw using the 6mm Allen key (1).
Legrest support bar
Spindle fork
assembly
6. Detach the spindle fork assembly from the seat casting by unscrewing the attachment
screw using the 6mm Allen key (1).

7. Cut the cable tie located on the spindle fork assembly (1) and unscrew the two
attachment screws of the backrest safety microswitch attachment plate using the
3mm Allen key and detach the attachment plate from the backrest motor assembly
(2).
8. Disconnect the Backrest motor cable from the seat cable adapter (1).

9. Detach the position sensor plate by unscrewing the two Ejot Torx DG 50x10 A2
attachment screws.
10. Detach the backrest motor grounding cable (1).

11. Unscrew the two M6x14 ISO 7380 screws at the backrest motor attachment plate
using the 4mm Allen key.
12. Detach the backrest motor mechanical limit from the seat casting by unscrewing the
M6x16 DIN 7984 attachment screw using 4mm Allen key.

13. Lift the backrest motor from the seat casting.
14. Detach the mechanical limit and bearing from the threaded motor axle.

15. Install the new backrest motor assembly in reverse order. Assemble new cable ties in
the place of the ones cut previously.
Backrest motor assembly
5.2 Replacing chair lift motor
WARNING
Care must be taken when replacing the chair lift motor. Removing parts of the lifting
assembly may enable the patient chair to fall causing a dangerous situation and/or
damage to the equipment. The downward movement of the chair must be elimi-
nated before the motor is detached.

Do not remove the worm screw securing nut. It must always be attached to the worm
screw.
Worm screw
securing nut
1. In the case that the motor is somewhat operational, drive the patient chair upwards
until you gain access to the opening on the lifting column. Insert a robust steel bar
through the lifting column. Carefully drive the chair downwards until the steel bar
supports the lifting adapter (and the chair).
If the motor is completely jammed, position a robust box etc. under the patient chair to
eliminate the downward movement of the chair.
Insert the steel bar
Drive carefully downwards until

the bar stops the movement
NOTE
Ensure that the steel bar supports the whole weight of the patient chair by trying to pull
out the bar. The steel bar must not move.
2. Remove the separator tank.

3. Lift aside the magnetic valve/pressure regulator assembly.

4. Remove the cuspidor cover.

5. Remove all the necessary cable ties relating to the Lift motor cable or the Lift motor
potentiometer cable.
6. Remove the lower cable guide by unscrewing the three M4x8 DIN 912 screws.
7. Remove the cover of the electronics control box.
8. Loosen the four screws that are holding the electronics control box in position and lift
the box aside to gain access to the lift motor.
9. Disconnect the Lift motor potentiometer cable from the connector P24 (Lift
potentiometer) on the Main control PCB.
10. Disconnect the Lift motor cable from the connector P23 (Lift motor).
11. Unscrew the eight M6x45 DIN 912 screws that hold the nut attachment plate in
position.
12. Remove the nut attachment plate and the lifting frames.
13. Remove the ø10 DIN 6799 locking ring from the lift motor attachment axle.
14. Slide the lift motor from the attachment axle and turn it in a way that the Motor
grounding cable can be detached. Detach the Motor grounding cable from the side of
the motor.
15. Lift the Lift motor from the cuspidor.
16. Unscrew the M10x25 ULS screw from the end of the worm screw and remove the
worm screw nut.
17. Detach the lift motor position sensor by unscrewing the two M5x12 DIN 7500 screws.
18. Grease the new motor’s worm screw. Install the new lift motor in reverse order.
NOTE
Pay attention when reconnecting the lift motor position sensor, refer to section 4.10
"Replacing position sensors" on page 264.
NOTE
Calibrate the lift motor position sensor as described in section 2.3 "Calibrating lift motor
position sensor" on page 221.

Ensure that the steel bar

supports the whole
weight of the chair!
Unscrew the eight screws
Electronics
control box
lifted aside Remove the nut attachment plate
and the lifting frames
Detach the grounding cable
Remove the locking ring

6 VALVES & FILTERS REPLACEMENT Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR
6 VALVES & FILTERS REPLACEMENT
6.1 Decompressing water and air pressures

1. Turn off the water supply line.
3. Turn off the air supply line.
4. Decompress the air pressure with the syringe instrument.
5. Turn off the unit.
6. If necessary, loosen the two screws attaching the magnetic valve assembly to the
cuspidor support plate and remove the assembly to get more space to replace the
valves.
6.2 Replacing entire magnetic valve/pressure regulator assembly
WARNING
Special care must be taken when disconnecting the water and air inlet tubes.
Ensure that the water and air supply lines are turned off.
NOTE
Any splashed water must be carefully removed prior to unit turn-on.
1. Decompress the water and air pressures as described in section 6.1 "Decompressing
water and air pressures" on page 278.
2. Loosen the two attachment screws (1) and lift off the magnetic valve/pressure
regulator assembly from the cuspidor plate (2).
3. Disconnect all the magnetic valve control cables that are connected to the valves.
4. Detach all the water and air tubes that are connected to the valves.
5. Install the new magnetic valve/pressure regulator assembly in reverse order.
6. Apply pressure to test that there are no air or water leaks.

Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR 6 VALVES & FILTERS REPLACEMENT
6.3 Replacing water and air filter/regulator assemblies
CAUTION
2. Loosen the two screws attaching the magnetic valve assembly to the cuspidor plate
and lift off the magnetic valve/pressure regulator assembly.
3. If necessary for easier access, disconnect the control cable from the main valve you
are working on.
4. Detach the water (N108-DS02) or air (N108-DS01) filter/regulator by unscrewing the
two bolts which hold it in position.
If necessary, detach the water or air filter by unscrewing it from the water or air
regulator.
5. Install the new filter/regulator into position in reverse order.
NOTE
Be careful not to overtighten the bolts. (Max. Torque 7 Nm)
6. Adjust the pressure regulator as described in section 3.1 "Adjusting internal water &
air pressures" on page 224:
• water 280 kPa (2.8 bar) (41 psi)
• air 550 kPa (5.5 bar) (80 psi)
Valve cable NOTE!

(green leads) Max. Torque 7 Nm
Bolts
Water main
valve
Air main valve
Water filter/regulator
N108-DS02 I
ZZ
In P. max. 16 bar
MO
C AMade in Italy
Valve cable
Out P. 0,5-10 bar
Valve (blue leads)

attachment block
Water inlet tube

replacereg1202.eps
Air inlet tube
Air filter/regulator
Bolts
Water filter I
Air filter N108-DS01
MO
ZZ
NOTE!
In P. max. 16 bar
Out P. 0,5-10 bar C AMade in Italy
Max. Torque 7 Nm

6.4 Replacing water and air filters and water regulator plug
2. Open the filter cup. Use the 17mm fork spanner if needed.
3. Remove the filter by unscrewing it from the regulator.
Filter cup
Filter
4. Water regulator: replacing the plug

If needed, the plug can be replaced after the water filter is removed. Pull the plug
away from the regulator. Lubricate the new plug with non-toxic vaseline and place it to
the regulator.
Plug

Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR 6 VALVES & FILTERS REPLACEMENT
5. Attach the new filter to its position and attach the filter cup. Be careful not to
overtighten the filter cup, you should be able to open it manually.
6. Adjust the pressure regulator as described in section 3.1 "Adjusting internal water &
air pressures" on page 224:
• water 280 kPa (2.8 bar) (41 psi)
• air 550 kPa (5.5 bar) (80 psi)
6.5 Replacing water/air regulator membrane

1. Remove the lock ring from the regulator cap.
2. Unscrew the four attachment screws of the regulator cap and remove the cap.
3. Replace the membrane. Note, that the air regulator membrane has a small opening in
the middle of the membrane.
Lock ring
Regulator cap
Membrane
6.6 Replacing water or air main valve assembly
CAUTION
2. Disconnect the control cable from the main valve you are working on.
3. Detach the locking nut from the main valve. Remove the old main valve. Detach the
valve bottom plate.
4. Remove the valve support and its attachment plate by unscrewing the four screws.
Remove the O-ring, spring and core.
5. Install the new main valve assembly in reverse order.

6. Check that the valve functions correctly.
Air main valve assembly

Locking nut
Air main valve
Valve cable
(green leads)
Valve bottom plate Valve cable

(blue leads)
Screws
Water main valve
Support attachment plate
Valve support
Bmainvalves1202.eps
Core

Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR 7 REPLACING WATER HEATER
7 REPLACING WATER HEATER

1. Close the unit main water line. Empty the water lines with cup fill tube and syringe.
2. Switch off the dental unit.
3. The water heater is located at the bottom of the cuspidor plate.
4. Open the electronics control box. Detach the water heater cable from the Main PCB
connector P14.

7 REPLACING WATER HEATER Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR
5. Unscrew two attachment screws using a 2.5 mm Allen key (white arrows).
6. Cut the instrument console water tubes (one from the magnetic valve assembly, the
other to the instrument console; white arrows).

Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR 7 REPLACING WATER HEATER
7. Detach the cup fill water tubes (one from the magnetic valve assembly, other to the
bowl assembly; white arrows).
8. Cut approx. 1 cm (0.4 in.) piece from the tube ends before attaching them to the new
water heater.
9. Install the new water heater in reverse order.

8 OP DELIVERY ARM PARTS REPLACEMENT Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR
8 OP DELIVERY ARM PARTS REPLACEMENT
8.1 Detaching instrument console from OP delivery arm

1. Remove all the instrument hoses and the instrument arms from the instrument
console.
2. Switch off the dental unit.
3. Cut the cable ties that secure the USB cable. Disconnect the USB cable.

Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR 8 OP DELIVERY ARM PARTS REPLACEMENT
4. Unscrew two the water valve assembly attachment screws.
5. Lift up the valve assembly and detach the arm water tube from the nipple.

6. Disconnect the cables and tubes of the console arm cable from the instrument
multiplexer .
7. Remove the friction adjuster by unscrewing two side and one top screws (black
arrows 4 mm Allen key, white 3 mm Allen key).

8. Lift off the whole instrument console (black arrows) and remove the bearing assembly
from the lower joint axle (white arrows).
8.2 Replacing OP delivery arm gas spring
NOTE
Please note that the console arm cable need not to be removed during this operation.
1. Release the tension of the gas spring (i.e. decrease the tension as much as possible)
as described in section 1.3 "Adjusting balance of OP delivery arm" on page 205.
2. Remove the instrument console and the lower joint axle as described in section 8.1
"Detaching instrument console from OP delivery arm" on page 286.

3. Remove the lifting arm cover.
4. Loosen the long lower joint pin locking screw using a 2 mm Allen key.

5. Unscrew two screws from under the lifting arm using a 3 mm Allen key.
6. Remove the cover plugs from the lifting arm.

7. Detach the locking ring.
8. Tap off the short lower joint pin with a hammer.

9. Tap off the long lower joint pin.
10. Lift off the lower joint axle and the lower joint cover.
11. Slide the arm joint cover from over the upper joint.

12. Lift the console arm to its upmost position. Remove the securing ring from the upper
joint pin.
13. Tap off the upper joint pin from the upper joint axle.

14. Remove the whole lifting arm assembly from inside the lifting arm.
15. Check the condition of the lifting arm assembly. If it is twisted or otherwise damaged,
replace the whole assembly.

16. Remove securing ring from the gas spring pin and remove the gas spring pin.
17. Remove the securing ring from the upper joint pin at the other end of the gas spring
and remove the upper joint pin.
NOTE
Check the condition of the arm cable. Replace also the cable, if needed.
18. Install the new gas spring in reverse order.

19. Adjust the balance of the instrument console as described in section 1.4 "Adjusting
angle of OP delivery arm instrument console" on page 211.
20. Adjust the balance of the console arm as described in section 1.3 "Adjusting balance
of OP delivery arm" on page 205.

8.3 Replacing OP delivery arm cable
NOTE
Be careful not to break the bowl collar when you replace the console arm cable.
1. Release the tension of the gas spring (i.e. decrease the tension as much as possible)
as described in section 1.3 "Adjusting balance of OP delivery arm" on page 205.
2. Detach the instrument console from the console arm as described in section 8.1
"Detaching instrument console from OP delivery arm" on page 286.
3. It is easier to replace the cable if you remove the gas spring, see section 8.2
"Replacing OP delivery arm gas spring" on page 289.
4. Unscrew four attachment screws of the rotating arm decorative cover and remove the
cover.

5. Pull the console arm cable out from the rotating arm opening.
6. Remove the protective membrane.

7. Pull the cables/tubes through the OP delivery arm and into console one by one.
8. Before pulling the last cable, attach a draw cord to it.
9. Disconnect the cables from the Main control PCB. Disconnect the USB cable from its
connector, Detach the water and air tubes.

10. Pull the new console arm cable to inside the delivery arm and into the cuspidor using
the draw cord. Ensure that the cable is not stretched or rubbed by the arm castings in
any position of the arm.
11. Pull the other end of the cables through the rotating arm.
12. Assemble the protective membrane carefully around the console arm joint.
13. Assemble and attach the removed parts in reverse order.
14. Adjust the balance of the console arm as described in section 1.3 "Adjusting balance
of OP delivery arm" on page 205.
15. If necessary, adjust the angle of the instrument console as described in section 1.4
"Adjusting angle of OP delivery arm instrument console" on page 211.

8.4 Replacing entire OP delivery arm
NOTE
Be careful not to break the bowl collar when you replace the console arm.
1. In the case that the dental light / Planmeca Intra / monitor is (are) installed to the
console arm, disconnect the cables from the main control PCB and remove the
equipment with posts from the delivery arm.
2. Disconnect the cables and tubes of the console arm from inside the cuspidor.
3. Rotate the console arm to over the patient chair. Unscrew two of the M8x30 DIN 912
screws that attach the console arm to the cuspidor. Loosen the M8x30 DIN 912 screw
inside the groove of the console arm adapter plate. Lift off the console arm (see
section “8.1 Attaching the OP delivery arm to the cuspidor” of the Installation manual).
4. Install the new console arm in reverse order.
5. Adjust the vertical position of the console arm column as described in section 1.1
"Adjusting vertical position of OP delivery arm column" on page 203.
Console arm
Loosen this screw
Comp9_CP3_24.eps
Console arm column
M8x30 DIN 912
Remove these screws

Console arm adapter

Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR 9 SIDE DELIVERY ARM PARTS REPLACEMENT
9 SIDE DELIVERY ARM PARTS REPLACEMENT
9.1 Replacing the side delivery arm gas spring

1. Open the console cover.
2. If the dental unit is equipped with the rotating tray, unscrew two tray attachment
screws and remove the tray.

9 SIDE DELIVERY ARM PARTS REPLACEMENT Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR
3. Cut the cable ties that attach arm cables to the instrument console.
4. Disconnect all the arm cables.

5. Detach the water nipple and potential equalizer cable from the console.
6. Unscrew the IMUX attachment screws and move the IMUX slightly away from its
position.

7. Unscrew three console attachment screws and remove the console.
8. Remove the joint cable guide.

9. Remove the cover plug.
10. Remove the upper joint cover ball and level arm cover.

11. Loosen two upper joint cover attachment screws.
12. Remove the upper joint cover.

13. Carefully route the cables out from the joint.
14. Cut the cable tie.

15. Loosen two joint attachment screws.
16. Pull the arm downwards and unscrew the level arm nut.

17. Remove the level arm axle.
18. Measure the adjustment screw length from the adjustment nut to the upper end.
When attaching the adjustment screw, install the screw to this length.

19. Rotate the adjustment screw out from the adjustment nut.
20. Unscrew four adjustment support attachment screws.

21. Remove the adjustment screw.
22. Unscrew two microswitch assembly attachment screws.

23. Lift the joint cover and loosen two axle attachment screws.
24. Support the arm and remove the axle.

25. Remove the level arm profile. Support the upper end, the level arm friction guide pins
are unfastened.
26. Unscrew the gas spring.

27. Detach the adjustment slide assembly locking washer.
28. Remove the adjustment slide assembly.

29. Install the new gas spring in reverse order.
NOTE
When attaching the level arm profile, insert the rubber O-rings to the level arm axle to
between the joint and profile as shown on the figure below.

10 MOBILE CART PARTS REPLACEMENT Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR
10 MOBILE CART PARTS REPLACEMENT
10.1 Replacing cart extension cable

Uscrew five bottom plate attachment screws and remove the bottom plate.

Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR 10 MOBILE CART PARTS REPLACEMENT
Cut the cable ties (1). Detach the air and water tubes from the nipples (2 and 3).
Disconnect the cables from the cables coming from the cart (4, 5 and 6). Disconnect the
USB cable (7). Detach the grounding lead (8). The cart extension cable nut (9) can now be
detached.
Detach the cart extension cable from the cart.
Detach the cart extension cable from the cuspidor.

Install the new cart extension cable in reverse order.

11 FLEXY HOLDER PARTS REPLACEMENT Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR
11 FLEXY HOLDER PARTS REPLACEMENT
11.1 Removing holder from suction arm
11.1.1 Chair mounted suction arm

1. Unscrew two upper arm cover attachment screws and remove the cover.

Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR 11 FLEXY HOLDER PARTS REPLACEMENT
2. Disconnect the holder cable.

3. Unscrew the holder attachment screws and lift the holder away from its position.
Holder attachment screws
11.1.2 Adjustable suction arm

1. Loosen the nut using a 5.5 mm spanner. Loosen the locking screw using a 1.5 mm
Allen key.

2. Push the arm its lowest position and remove the holder. Cut the cable tie and
disconnect the holder cable.
11.2 Dismantling holder

1. Unscrew eight top cover attachment screws.

2. Push the cable into the holder.
3. The holder can now be opened.

11.3 Parts replacement

1. Replace the needed part(s).
2. Assemble the holder and attach it back to the suction arm.
The following parts can be replaced:

• Top cover including Flexible 3 position censor coil (with or without PCB)
• Suction tube holder PCB
• Control panels
• Bottom cover assembly
• Holder cable
11.3.1 Replacing Suction tube holder PCB

1. Remove the old PCB from the top cover.
2. Attach the Flexible 3 position sensor coil to the new PCB. Make sure that you push
the Flexible 3 position sensor coil perpendicularly to the connector.

3. Push the control panel cables perpendicularly to the PCB holder. The metal side must
be towards the PCB.
4. Connect the holder cable to the PCB.
5. Assemble the holder and attach it to the suction arm.

11.3.2 Replacing holder cable

1. Connect the holder cable to the PCB and route the cable through the holder bearing.
2. Cut the excess leads of the cable and shield the ends with e.g. electrical tape.
3. Attach the cable leads to the connector as shown on the figure below.
Red
3
3 1 White
1
4 2 2 Black
4. Assemble the holder and attach it to the suction arm.

11.4 Flexy holder testing
11.4.1 Service modes

Check the following service modes.
1. SM 51: Value 3 on the left side of the vertical bars indicates that the Flexy sensor PCB
is detected and operational.

2. SM 56, 57 and 58: The display range is 0 to 255. When a suction tube is in the holder,
the signal should be within the range 100 - 255. When no tube is in the holder, the
signal should be within the range 25 - 195. The signal level difference should be at
least 60 points when the suction tube is removed from the holder and returned to the
holder
3. SM 160: Check that the programmable Flexy button has a correct function.
11.4.2 Manual test

Check the operation of all the control panel buttons.

Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR 12 SUCTION SYSTEM RELATED
12 SUCTION SYSTEM RELATED
12.1 Function of PM Microvac II separating tank
12.1.1 Idle situation
Electrical function:
No control voltage is connected to any of the valves, suc-
tion motor stopped (if controlled by the unit).
Pneumatical function:
All the membranes are open.
12.1.2 Suction hose removed from the holder

Microvac valve
Suction closing The suction motor relay connects on the Main control PCB
membrane and the suction motor starts (if controlled by the unit).
Control voltage is connected to the Microvac and flushing
valves.
The Microvac valve enables the suction closing mem-
brane to connect the vacuum to the upper chamber (and
to the suction hose). The intermediate membrane is
forced to expand by the vacuum in the upper chamber.
The pressure balancing membrane over the intermediate
Pressure balancing membrane moves upwards and blocks the opening
membrane between the upper chamber and the lower chamber.
Saliva and water begins to gather into the upper chamber.
Intermediate
membrane

12 SUCTION SYSTEM RELATED Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR
12.1.3 Pulse valve opens (after every five seconds)
Pulse valve
Control voltage is connected to the microvac, pulse and
flushing valves.
The vacuum is connected to the membrane assembly
(drain and intermediate membranes). The intermediate
Breather membrane is forced to shrink by the vacuum. The pres-
valve sure balancing membrane stays in position (due to the
pressure difference between the chambers) preventing
water from flowing to the lower chamber. The drain mem-
brane blocks the opening from the lower chamber to the
drain. The vacuum also closes the breather valve.
Intermediate
membrane
Membrane
assembly
Drain membrane
After about 0.5 seconds the pressure difference between

the chambers is balanced by the pressure balancing tube.
The pressure balancing membrane moves downwards
due to gravity allowing saliva and water to flow to the
lower chamber.
Pressure
balancing tube

12.1.4 Pulse valve closes (after every five seconds)
Control voltage is no longer connected to the pulse valve.
The vacuum in the upper chamber forces the intermediate
membrane to expand, thus the pressure balancing mem-
brane blocks the opening between the upper and lower
chambers. The breather valve opens, since the pulse
valve no longer connects the vacuum to the membrane of
the breather valve. The drain membrane opens allowing
water to flow into the drain.
12.1.5 Overfill situation
The safety switch connects and cuts the control voltage
from all the valves related to the separating tank.
Safety
switch Pneumatical function:
The liquid level in the upper chamber reaches the critical
point and the float pushes the microswitch. All the mem-
Float branes are open and water flows to the drain from both
the chambers. Since the main valve is closed, the vacuum
is not led to the tank nor the suction tubes. The suction will
start again after five seconds delay, supposing that the liq-
uid level has fallen below the critical level.

12.2 Replacing entire PM Microvac II separating tank
WARNING
Used separating tank includes saliva and bacteria. Always wear protective clothing
when handling the separating tank.
1. Turn off the unit. In the case that suction motor is not controlled by the unit, turn off the
suction motor.
2. Detach the suction line and the suction filter tubes from the separating tank.
3. Disconnect the Microvac cable from the Microvac valve and disconnect the overfill
switch cables.
4. Disconnect the pulse valve tube from the front of the separating tank.
5. Lift the separating tank from the socket.
6. Install the new separating tank in reverse order.
Microvac cable Pulse valve tube
Suction filter tube
Suction
line tube
Overfill
switch cables
Microvac
Microvac II socket

12.3 Replacing pressure balancing membrane

1. Detach the Microvac II separating tank from the unit as described in section 12.2
"Replacing entire PM Microvac II separating tank" on page 330.
2. Disconnect the upper part of the pressure balancing tube from the lower part.
3. Detach the four fastening clips and lift off the upper chamber assembly.
4. Lift off the intermediate section assembly.
5. Detach the old pressure balancing membrane from the lower part of the pressure
balancing tube inside the lower chamber as shown below.
6. Install the new pressure balancing membrane in reverse order.
Upper chamber
assembly
Fastening clip
Pressure
balancing tube
(upper part)
Quick connector Intermediate section
assembly
Pressure balancing
membrane
Intermediate
membrane
MVac31298.eps
Lower chamber
assembly
MVac61298.eps
Pressure
balancing tube
(lower part)
O-ring 10x3.5
Drain membrane
12.4 Replacing intermediate and/or drain membrane

2. Remove the pressure balancing membrane as described in section 12.3 "Replacing
pressure balancing membrane" on page 331.
3. Unscrew the intermediate membrane while holding the drain membrane in position.
The drain membrane and the 10x3.5 O-ring will now detach.
4. Lift off the intermediate membrane from inside the lower chamber.
5. Install the new intermediate membrane and/or the new drain membrane in reverse
order.

12.5 Replacing suction closing membrane

2. Remove the lid assembly by unscrewing the four M3X16 screws.
3. Lift off the old suction closing membrane.
4. Install the new suction closing membrane in reverse order.
NOTE
Care must be taken when positioning the suction closing membrane.
NOTE
Tighten the lid assembly screws crosswise.
Screw M3x16
Note the positions of the grooves!
Lid assembly
Suction closing
membrane
MVac41298.eps

Chapter J: FOOT CONTROL
1 PROGRAMMING WIRELESS FOOT CONTROL
1.1 Pairing wireless foot control

If no wireless foot control is connected to your dental unit, or if you want to change the
current wireless foot control to another, you must pair the dental unit and the foot control.
1. Press Program.
2. Press Foot control.

The Wireless foot control window opens.
3. Open the Configuration tab.
4. The Foot control serial no field displays the current foot control’s serial number. If you
want to change the foot control, press Edit.
The Bind foot control window opens.
NOTE
On the foot control, the serial number can be found on its underside.

1 PROGRAMMING WIRELESS FOOT CONTROL Chapter J: FOOT CONTROL
5. Press and hold down the handle of the foot control that you want to pair your dental
unit with to select it.
The selected foot control is shown with a black font on the list (marked with arrow in
the picture below).
The foot control that is highlighted in blue is the currently paired foot control.
NOTE
For information on the different markings in the Bind foot control window, press
Questionmark.
6. While holding the handle down, start pairing by touching the name of the selected foot
control (black font) on the list.
A confirmation message is displayed on the dental unit’s control panel.
7. Press OK to confirm the start of the pairing process.
8. Release the foot control handle.

Once the pairing is done, a message is displayed on the dental unit’s control panel
and the paired foot control is highlighted in blue on the list.
If the pairing is not successful, you will receive a notification, after which you can retry
to perform the pairing.
9. Press OK to exit the window.

Chapter J: FOOT CONTROL 1 PROGRAMMING WIRELESS FOOT CONTROL
1.2 Changing battery indicator visibility
1. Press Program.

3. Open the Configuration tab.
The Battery field shows the current charging level of the battery.
4. Press Battery to open the battery’s charging history log.

If no graph is displayed, press the foot control handle.
5. Press OK. The changes are saved and the pop-up window closes.
1.3 Adjusting radio settings

The following describes how to optimise the communication between the dental unit and
the wireless foot control.
1. Press Program.

1 PROGRAMMING WIRELESS FOOT CONTROL Chapter J: FOOT CONTROL

3. Open the Radio tab.
NOTE
If the Foot control channel and Transmitter power fields are inactive, you must press the
foot control handle to enable the adjusting of the settings.
4. Select the foot control channel by pressing the Minus (-) and Plus (+) buttons.
You can freely choose between the channels 1 and 16, but, to minimise radio signal
interference, no two foot controls within 10 meters of each other should have the
same channel.
5. Adjust the transmitter power by pressing the Minus (-) and Plus (+) buttons.
Select the lowest power level and increase it, if needed. The value range is 1 (lowest)
to 6 (highest).
6. Press OK to confirm your selections and exit the programming mode.
To exit the programming mode without confirming, press Cancel.

Chapter J: FOOT CONTROL 2 PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR
2 PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR
2.1 Removing foot control cover

1. Unscrew the eight attachment screws of the bottom plate using a 2.5 mm Allen key
and remove the plate.
S78_1.eps
2. Unscrew the four attachment screws of the cover assembly using a T20 Torx key and
remove the cover assembly.
SC_228.eps

2 PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR Chapter J: FOOT CONTROL
2.2 Replacing foot control PCB

1. Remove the foot control cover as described in section 2.1 "Removing foot control
cover" on page 337.
2. Detach the foot control cable from connector J2 on the foot control PCB.
3. Unscrew the four M4x10 DIN 7991 screws with a 2.5 mm Allen key and remove the
foot control PCB.
4. Install the new foot control PCB in reverse order.
Foot control PCB

SC_228.eps
5. Attach the foot control cover.

2.3 Replacing foot control handle

cover" on page 337.
2. Remove the foot control PCB as described in section 2.2 "Replacing foot control PCB"
on page 338.
3. Unscrew the four handle attachment screws using a 2.5 mm Allen key. Remove the
handle and the handle springs.
4. Apply a drop of Loctite 2400 sealer (or corresponding) to the handle attachment
screws and attach the new handle to its position (1).
5. Carefully press the new springs (2) between the handle lug and base (3). Make sure
that the springs are properly in their positions.
SC_230.eps
3
2
1
6. Ensure that the microswitch works by pressing down the foot control handle.
7. Attach the foot control PCB and foot control cover to their positions.

2.4 Replacing pedal assembly

cover" on page 337.
on page 338.
3. Loosen the adjusting screw using a 4 mm Allen key.
4. Unscrew the two screws that hold the bearing bar in position using a 2.5 mm Allen key
and remove the bearing bar.
5. Remove the pedal assembly. (If necessary, screw in the pedal height adjuster screw
on the underside of the foot control, then lift the pedal assembly off the foot control.)
6. Unscrew the height adjuster screws from the bearing bar and foot control casing.
7. Remove the bearings from the bearing bar and foot control casing with e.g. a
screwdriver.
8. Grease the new bearings with molybdenum grease. Carefully attach the bearings to
their positions.
9. Put the new pedal assembly into place. Adjust the pedal’s position by turning the
eccentric screw until the pedal is centred. The eccentric screw turns 180° as shown in
the picture below. Apply Loctite 2700 to the screw thread.
NOTE
After applying Loctite 2700 you have 15 minutes to complete the pedal assembly
replacement.

10. Place the bearing bar to its position and secure it with the two attachment screws.
Apply a drop of Loctite 2400 sealer (or corresponding) to the attachment screws.
Bearing Height adjuster screw
Bearing bar
Bearing
SC_231.eps
Adjusting screw
Height adjuster screw
11. Adjust the pedal height as described in section 3.2 "Adjusting height of foot control
pedal" on page 344.
12. Put the foot control PCB back in position and secure it with the four screws. Connect
the foot control cable to connector J2.
13. Attach the foot control cover.
14. Calibrate the foot control as described in section 3.3 "Calibrating foot control" on page
347.

2.5 Wireless foot control: replacing batteries

Battery size: AA, LR6
Battery type : NiMH 1.2V, min 2050mAh, low self-discharge, UL-listed (USA, Canada only)
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
1. Unscrew the eight attachment screws of the bottom plate using a 2.5 mm Allen key
(1).
2. Remove the plate (2).
3. Replace three batteries (3).
3
fcntrl1_120313.eps

Chapter J: FOOT CONTROL 3 ADJUSTMENTS
3 ADJUSTMENTS
3.1 Adjusting angle of foot control pedal

cover" on page 337.
2. Judging by eye, adjust the slope of the sector plate so that it is parallel with the four
PCB supports by tightening the angle adjusting screw.
3. Loosen the locking nut with a 2 mm screwdriver. Adjust the angle of the pedal by
tightening/loosening the angle adjusting screw. The front end of the pedal should
move 4-5mm vertically (up/down) for convenient use of the foot control. If the pedal is
tilted too much, the front end of the pedal’s sector plate could touch the foot control
PCB and damage it quickly.
PCB supports PCB supports Foot control pedal

Angle adjusting screw
Sector plate
Locking nut
SC_232.eps
4. Reassemble the foot control in reverse order.
347.

3 ADJUSTMENTS Chapter J: FOOT CONTROL
3.2 Adjusting height of foot control pedal

cover" on page 337.
on page 338.
3. Apply a drop of Loctite 2400 sealer (or corresponding) to the pedal height adjustment
screw. Do not allow Loctite to get to the pedal axle. Grease the axle with molybdenum
grease. Tighten the adjustment screw completely
Bearing bar
Foot control pedal
SC_233.eps
Pedal height adjustment screw
Clockwise
4. Loosen the pedal height adjustment on the underside of the foot control approx. 1/4
turn. SC_234.eps
Pedal height adjustment screw
approx. 1/4 turn

counter clockwise

5. Apply a drop of Loctite 2400 sealer (or corresponding) to the upper adjustment screw.
Do not allow Loctite to get to the pedal axle. Tighten the upper adjustment screw
completely (the foot control pedal does not move freely).
clockwise
Upper adjustment screw
235.eps
6. Then loosen the upper adjustment screw approx. 1/4 turn so that the foot control
pedal can move freely.
approx. 1/4 turn

counter clockwise
SC_236.eps

7. Check that the sector plate minimum distance from he foot control PCB is 0.6 mm -
0.8 mm and that the sector plate is visually estimated straight (inclination max. 0.5
mm).
A B
A= 0,6-0,8 mm
B-A= 0,5 mm
SC_237.eps
8. Reassemble the foot control in reverse order.

347.

3.3 Calibrating foot control

The principle of the calibration of the foot control is that there are six pedal positions that
need to be determined (left down/up, centre down/up and right down/up). Hold the foot
control pedal in the desired position and determine the position by moving either of the
side knobs up.
3.3.1 Entering and exiting the foot control calibration mode

To enter the foot control calibration mode, insert a screwdriver through the opening at the
bottom of the foot control. Press the calibration switch briefly with the screwdriver.
fcntrl2_120313.eps
If you want to exit the foot control calibration mode, press the calibration switch briefly with
the screwdriver.

3.3.2 Calibrating the foot control

Enter foot control calibration mode.
Move the foot control pedal to the leftmost position and hold (1). While holding, move the
side knob briefly up (2). Release the foot control pedal.
SC_222.eps
1
Remain the foot control pedal at the centre position (1). While in centre position, move the
side knob briefly up (2).
SC_223.eps

Move the foot control pedal to the rightmost position and hold (1). While holding, move the
side knob briefly up (2). Release the foot control pedal.
SC_224.eps
Move the foot control pedal to the rightmost position (1). Press the pedal down and hold
(2). While holding, move the side knob briefly up (3). Release the foot control pedal.
SC_225.eps
1 2

Remain the foot control pedal at the centre position (1). Press the foot control pedal
downwards and hold (2). While holding, move the side knob briefly up (3). Release the
foot control pedal.
SC_226.eps
1
2
Move the foot control pedal to the leftmost position (1). Press the pedal down and hold (2).
While holding, move the side knob briefly up (3). Release the foot control pedal.
SC_227.eps
1
2
The foot control calibration is now performed and the dental unit will automatically exit the
calibration mode.
Switch the dental unit off and again on.
Test the calibration by driving micromotor instrument and verifying that 100% strength is
reached before mechanical limit in first preventing step.
Check that the foot control side knobs change the GUI displays and the centre knob
activates the functions.

Chapter K: DIAGRAMS

air air water
drive spray spray
P P P
From cuspidor
P
WATER
A
AIR
B
1 2 3 4 5
Steripump
Syringe water system
control
valve
A
B
C
To instrument
Instr.1
control
valve
A
B
C
Instr.2
control
valve
A
B
C
Instr.3
control
valve
A
B
C
Instr.4
control
valve
air exhaust
1 2 3 4 5
PLANMECA OY
Date
Rev. ECO Description of changes Designer Date 19.11.2012 PNEUMATICAL DIAGRAM
Sorvaajankatu 7 Designed
E Diagram updated V.Poutiainen 19.11.12 00880 Helsinki Finland PLANMECA Compact i Touch V2
Tel +358 20 7795 500 instrument console
Drawn
Fax +358 20 7795 555
www.planmeca.com S.Jänkävaara
[email protected] Checked
V.Poutiainen Rev.E
air air water
drive spray spray
P P P
From cuspidor
P
WATER
A
AIR
B
1 2 3 4 5
Steripump
Syringe water system
control
valve
A
B
C
To instrument
Instr.1
control
valve
A
B
C
Instr.2
control
valve
A
B
C
Instr.3
control
valve
A
B
C
Instr.4
control
valve
air exhaust
1 2 3 4 5
PLANMECA OY
Date
Sorvaajankatu 7 Designed
E Diagram updated V.Poutiainen 19.11.12 00880 Helsinki Finland PLANMECA Compact i Touch V2
Tel +358 20 7795 500 instrument console with Steripump
Drawn
Fax +358 20 7795 555 water system
V.Poutiainen Rev.E
To instrument
Spittoon
console
Instrument OPTIONAL ASSISTANT
Flushing SYRINGE
A B
Suction tubes
Water
WATER LINE IF
Air
OPTIONAL
CLEAN WATER
SYSTEM Water collector
Coarse filters
OPTIONAL 2 cm
CLEAN WATER
SYSTEM
SUCTION RINSE
Dürr
suction
valve
Dürr CAS1 Separator

CUP FILLER
BOWL RINSE
separator
Dürr station
selector valve
Deposit cup
OPTIONAL
WATER
HEATER
OPTIONAL
AIR
QUICK CONNECTOR
OPTIONAL
WATER
QUICK CONNECTOR
Water collector overflow tube
Suction Ø 19 mm
Drain Ø 19 mm
AIR WATER
AIR 550 - 900 kPa WATER 300 - 900 kPa
Date
Rev. ECO Description of changes Designer Date PLANMECA OY 16.11.2015 PNEUMATICAL DIAGRAM
Sorvaajankatu 7 Designed PLANMECA Compact i Touch V2
G Diagram updated V.Poutiainen 19.11.12 00880 Helsinki Finland
H Diagram updated 16.11.15 with Dürr CAS1 amalgam
Tel +358 20 7795 500
Fax +358 20 7795 555 Drawn separating system ,
www.planmeca.com Non-Selective suction system
Rev.H
To instrument
Spittoon
console
Flushing SYRINGE
A B
Suction tubes
Water
WATER LINE IF
Air
OPTIONAL
CLEAN WATER
Coarse filters
OPTIONAL Selective
CLEAN WATER 2 cm Suction
SYSTEM System
SUCTION RINSE
Dürr Dürr
suction suction
valve valve
Dürr CAS1 Separator

CUP FILLER
BOWL RINSE
separator
Dürr station
selector valve
Deposit cup
OPTIONAL
WATER
HEATER
OPTIONAL
AIR
QUICK CONNECTOR
OPTIONAL
WATER
QUICK CONNECTOR
Suction Ø 19 mm
Drain Ø 19 mm
AIR WATER
AIR 550 - 900 kPa WATER 300 - 900 kPa
Date
H Diagram updated 16.11.15 with Dürr CAS1 amalgam
Tel +358 20 7795 500
www.planmeca.com Selective suction system
Rev.H
To instrument
Spittoon
console
Flushing SYRINGE
A B
Suction tubes
Water
WATER LINE IF
Air
OPTIONAL
CLEAN WATER
Coarse filters
OPTIONAL
CLEAN WATER 2 cm
SYSTEM
SUCTION RINSE
Dürr
suction
valve
CUP FILLER
BOWL RINSE
Dürr CS1+GF1 Separator
separator
Breather
Dürr station
selector valve
Deposit cup
Outlet plug
OPTIONAL
WATER
HEATER
OPTIONAL
AIR
QUICK CONNECTOR
OPTIONAL
WATER
QUICK CONNECTOR
Suction Ø 19 mm
Drain Ø 19 mm
AIR WATER
AIR 550 - 900 kPa WATER 300 - 900 kPa
Date
C Diagram updated 15.11.15 00880 Helsinki Finland
with Dürr CS1+GF1 amalgam
Tel +358 20 7795 500
Rev.C
To instrument
Spittoon
console
Flushing SYRINGE
A B
Suction tubes
Water
WATER LINE IF
Air
OPTIONAL
CLEAN WATER
Coarse filters
OPTIONAL
2 cm
CLEAN WATER
SYSTEM
SUCTION RINSE
Dürr
suction
valve
CUP FILLER
BOWL RINSE
Dürr CS1 Separator
separator
Breather
Dürr station
selector valve
Deposit cup
Outlet pipe
OPTIONAL
WATER
HEATER
OPTIONAL
AIR
QUICK CONNECTOR
OPTIONAL
WATER
QUICK CONNECTOR
Suction Ø 19 mm
Drain Ø 19 mm
AIR WATER
AIR 550 - 900 kPa WATER 300 - 900 kPa
Date
B Diagram updated V.Poutiainen 19.11.12 00880 Helsinki Finland
with Dürr CS1 amalgam
C Diagram updated 16.11.15 Tel +358 20 7795 500
Rev.C
To instrument
Spittoon
WATER LINE IF
console
Instrument OPTIONAL OPTIONAL ASSISTANT
Flushing CLEAN WATER SYRINGE
SYSTEM
A B
OPTIONAL
CLEAN WATER
SYSTEM
Suction tubes
Water
WATER LINE IF
Air
OPTIONAL
CLEAN WATER
Coarse filters
OPTIONAL Selective
CLEAN WATER 2 cm
Suction
SYSTEM System
SUCTION RINSE
Dürr Dürr
suction suction
valve valve
CUP FILLER
BOWL RINSE
Dürr CS1 Separator
separator
Breather
Dürr station
selector valve
Deposit cup
Outlet pipe
OPTIONAL
WATER
HEATER
OPTIONAL
AIR
QUICK CONNECTOR
OPTIONAL
WATER
QUICK CONNECTOR
Suction Ø 19 mm
Drain Ø 19 mm
AIR WATER
AIR 550 - 900 kPa WATER 300 - 900 kPa
Date
C Diagram updated 16.11.15 with Dürr CS1 amalgam
Tel +358 20 7795 500
www.planmeca.com Selective suction system
Rev.C
To instrument
Spittoon
console
Flushing SYRINGE
A B
Suction tubes
Water
WATER LINE IF
Air
OPTIONAL
CLEAN WATER
Coarse filters
OPTIONAL
CLEAN WATER 2 cm
SYSTEM
Dürr
SUCTION RINSE
suction
valve
Dürr VSA
CUP FILLER
BOWL RINSE
system
OPTIONAL
WATER
HEATER
OPTIONAL
AIR
QUICK CONNECTOR
Suction Ø 25 mm
OPTIONAL
WATER
QUICK CONNECTOR
To VSA suction pump
AIR WATER
AIR 550 - 900 kPa WATER 300 - 900 kPa
Date
H Diagram updated 15.11.15 with Dürr VSA system ,
Tel +358 20 7795 500
Fax +358 20 7795 555 Drawn Non-Selective suction system
www.planmeca.com
Rev.H
To instrument
Spittoon
console
Flushing SYRINGE
A B
Suction tubes
Water
WATER LINE IF
Air
OPTIONAL
CLEAN WATER
Coarse filters
OPTIONAL
Selective
SYSTEM System
SUCTION RINSE
Dürr Dürr
suction suction
valve valve
Dürr VSA
CUP FILLER
BOWL RINSE
system
OPTIONAL
WATER
HEATER
OPTIONAL
AIR
QUICK CONNECTOR
Suction Ø 25 mm
OPTIONAL
WATER
QUICK CONNECTOR
To VSA suction pump
AIR WATER
AIR 550 - 900 kPa WATER 300 - 900 kPa
Date
H Diagram updated V.Poutiainen 19.11.12 00880 Helsinki Finland
I Diagram updated 16.11.15 with Dürr VSA system ,
Tel +358 20 7795 500
Fax +358 20 7795 555 Drawn Selective suction system
www.planmeca.com
Rev.I
To instrument
Spittoon
console
Flushing SYRINGE
A B
Suction tubes
Water
WATER LINE IF
Air
OPTIONAL
CLEAN WATER
Coarse filters
OPTIONAL
CLEAN WATER 2 cm
SYSTEM
SUCTION RINSE
Dürr
suction
valve
Separator
Metasys Typ1
separator
CUP FILLER
BOWL RINSE
Amalgam container
OPTIONAL
WATER
HEATER
OPTIONAL
AIR
QUICK CONNECTOR
OPTIONAL
WATER
QUICK CONNECTOR
Suction Ø 19 mm
Drain Ø 19 mm
AIR WATER
AIR 550 - 900 kPa WATER 300 - 900 kPa
Date
H Diagram updated 16.11.15 with Metasys Typ1 amalgam
Tel +358 20 7795 500
Fax +358 20 7795 555 Drawn separating system,
Rev.H
To instrument
Spittoon
console
Flushing SYRINGE
A B
Suction tubes
Water
WATER LINE IF
Air
OPTIONAL
CLEAN WATER
Coarse filters
OPTIONAL
CLEAN WATER 2 cm
SYSTEM
SUCTION RINSE Microvac Separator
separator
CUP FILLER
BOWL RINSE
MICROVAC
PULSE
Outlet pipe
Deposit cup
OPTIONAL
WATER
HEATER
OPTIONAL
AIR
QUICK CONNECTOR
OPTIONAL
WATER
QUICK CONNECTOR
Suction Ø 19 mm
Drain Ø 19 mm
AIR WATER
AIR 550 - 900 kPa WATER 300 - 900 kPa
Date
with Microvac amalgam separating system,
H Diagram updated 16.11.15 Tel +358 20 7795 500
Drawn Non-Selective suction system
Fax +358 20 7795 555
www.planmeca.com
Rev.H
To instrument
Spittoon
console
Flushing SYRINGE
A B
Water
WATER LINE IF
Air
OPTIONAL
CLEAN WATER
SYSTEM
OPTIONAL
CLEAN WATER
SYSTEM
No Suction
CUP FILLER
BOWL RINSE
Outlet pipe
Deposit cup
OPTIONAL
WATER
HEATER
OPTIONAL
AIR
QUICK CONNECTOR
OPTIONAL
WATER
QUICK CONNECTOR
Drain Ø 19 mm
AIR WATER
AIR 550 - 900 kPa WATER 300 - 900 kPa
Date
F Diagram updated V.Poutiainen 19.11.12 00880 Helsinki Finland
G Diagram updated 16.11.15 No suction system,
Tel +358 20 7795 500
Drawn
Fax +358 20 7795 555
www.planmeca.com
Rev.G
To instrument
Spittoon
console
Flushing SYRINGE
A B
Suction tubes
Water
WATER LINE IF
Air
OPTIONAL
CLEAN WATER
Coarse filters
OPTIONAL
CLEAN WATER 2 cm
SYSTEM
Dürr
SUCTION RINSE
suction
valve
Wet system
CUP FILLER
BOWL RINSE
Outlet pipe
Deposit cup
OPTIONAL
WATER
HEATER
OPTIONAL
AIR
QUICK CONNECTOR
OPTIONAL
WATER
QUICK CONNECTOR
Suction Ø 19 mm
Drain Ø 19 mm
AIR WATER
AIR 550 - 900 kPa WATER 300 - 900 kPa
Date
H Diagram updated 16.11.15 with Wet suction system ,
Tel +358 20 7795 500
Fax +358 20 7795 555 Drawn Non-Selective suction system
www.planmeca.com
Rev.H
To instrument
Spittoon
console
Flushing SYRINGE
A B
Suction tubes
Water
WATER LINE IF
Air
OPTIONAL
CLEAN WATER
Coarse filters
OPTIONAL Selective
SYSTEM System
SUCTION RINSE
Dürr Dürr
suction suction
valve valve
Wet system
CUP FILLER
BOWL RINSE
Outlet pipe
Deposit cup
OPTIONAL
WATER
HEATER
OPTIONAL
AIR
QUICK CONNECTOR
OPTIONAL
WATER
QUICK CONNECTOR
Suction Ø 19 mm
Drain Ø 19 mm
AIR WATER
AIR 550 - 900 kPa WATER 300 - 900 kPa
Date
I Diagram updated V.Poutiainen 19.11.12 00880 Helsinki Finland
J Diagram updated 16.11.15 with Wet suction system ,
Tel +358 20 7795 500
Fax +358 20 7795 555 Drawn Selective suction system
www.planmeca.com
Rev.J
Centralized STCS
Suction rinsing water
Suction
Valve
Vacuum
Suction Tubes
Over
Leaking
STCS STCS
Clean LQD
Water Valve Valve
Vacuum
Suction
Vacuum
Suction
Valve
Suction
DrainValve
Water Orotol Supply

Suction
2-5 Bar
PLANMECA OY
Date
C Diagram updated V.Poutiainen 19.11.12 00880 Helsinki Finland
Centralized Suction Tube Cleaning System
Tel +358 20 7795 500
Fax +358 20 7795 555 Drawn (STCS)
www.planmeca.com V.Poutiainen
V.Poutiainen Rev.C
Manual STCS
Orotol
Suction rinsing water
Suction
Valve
Vacuum
Suction Tubes
Over
Leaking
STCS
Water Valve
Vacuum
Vacuum
Suction
Suction
DrainValve
Suction
Valve
Suction Water
PLANMECA OY
Date
C Diagram updated V.Poutiainen 19.11.12 00880 Helsinki Finland
Manual Suction Tube Cleaning System
Tel +358 20 7795 500
Fax +358 20 7795 555 Drawn (STCS)
www.planmeca.com V.Poutiainen
V.Poutiainen Rev.C
Air regulator
1.5bar
Waterline cleaning
solution Cleaning
or Main water in system
switch adapter
Sensor
to Planmeca Compact
dental unit
container
cleaning
Air Water / cleaning solution solution
AIR WATER
AIR 550 - 900 kPa WATER 300 - 900 kPa
PLANMECA OY
Date
with water line cleaning system (WCS)
Tel +358 20 7795 500
Drawn
Fax +358 20 7795 555
V.Poutiainen Rev.B
Planmeca Oy | Asentajankatu 6 | 00880 Helsinki | Finland
tel. +358 20 7795 500 | fax +358 20 7795 555 | [email protected] | www.planmeca.com

Technical Iv2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Iv2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Iv2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Planmeca Compact i Touch v2

& Planmeca Compact™ i Classic v2

Chapter A: GENERAL & TECHNICAL DATA

Chapter B: CONTROL PANEL FUNCTIONS

Chapter C: USER TYPES AND PERSONAL SETTINGS

Chapter D: SERVICE MODE

Technical manual Planmeca Compact i Touch & Classic v2 1

Chapter E: HELP & ERROR MESSAGES

2 Planmeca Compact i Touch & Classic v2 Technical manual

3 DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF ERROR MESSAGES ........................................................ 166

Chapter F: ROMEXIS CONNECTION CONFIGURATION

Chapter G: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Technical manual Planmeca Compact i Touch & Classic v2 3

3.11 Clean water system ................................................................................................................. 186

4 Planmeca Compact i Touch & Classic v2 Technical manual

4 BLEEDING OF SPRAY WATER SYSTEM ........................................................................ 226

Chapter I: PARTS REPLACEMENT & REPAIR

Technical manual Planmeca Compact i Touch & Classic v2 5

Chapter J: FOOT CONTROL

Planmeca pursues a policy of continual product development. Although every effort is

6 Planmeca Compact i Touch & Classic v2 Technical manual

2 SYMBOLS ON PRODUCT LABELS

SGS listing marking according to US and Canadian standards

Type B equipment (Standard IEC 60878).

Alternating current (Standard IEC 60878).

Attention, consult accompanying documents (Standard ISO 7010).

General warning (Standard ISO 7010).

Technical manual Planmeca Compact i Touch & Classic v2 7

Warning, crushing hazard: hand (Standard IEC 60878).

Warning; Hot surface (Standard ISO 7010).

IPX1 Protected against dripping water (Standard IEC 60529).

Disposable item. Do not reuse (Standard ISO 7000).

Sterilised using steam or dry heat (Standard ISO 7000).

Do not put fingers inside mechanical parts.

Date of manufacture (Standard IEC 60878).

Protective earth (Standard IEC 60878).

Radio certification (Japanese Radio Law certification symbol).

8 Planmeca Compact i Touch & Classic v2 Technical manual

Turn the main switch off

Technical manual Planmeca Compact i Touch & Classic v2 9

The Planmeca PlanScan scanner is delivered with the following manual:

The Planmeca ProSensor sensor is delivered with the following manuals:

The sterile water system is delivered with the following manual:

10 Planmeca Compact i Touch & Classic v2 Technical manual

Technical manual Planmeca Compact i Touch & Classic v2 11

5 WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS

12 Planmeca Compact i Touch & Classic v2 Technical manual

Technical manual Planmeca Compact i Touch & Classic v2 13

Maximum lifting capacity of chair, excluding weight of unit

Unit operating conditions

14 Planmeca Compact i Touch & Classic v2 Technical manual

Mains voltage and frequency

Fuse rating and type

Operation of chair lift and backrest motors

Technical manual Planmeca Compact i Touch & Classic v2 15

Foot control power supply (optional)

Wireless foot control (optional)

Planmeca ProSensor power supply (optional)

Suction system cleaning, Orotol Plus